Lexus - RX 350 - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012 (2)

£9.99

Get your hands on the complete Lexus factory workshop software

Download now

Check out our popular Lexus Other Model Manuals below:

Lexus LS430 2003-2006 Factory Repair Manual

2001 Lexus ES300 Repair Manual PDF

2000 Lexus GS300 GS400 Service Repair Manual PDF

2002 Lexus ES300 Repair Manual and Electrical Wiring Diagram PDF

See All

Lexus LS430 2003-2006 Factory Repair Manual

2001 Lexus ES300 Repair Manual PDF

2000 Lexus GS300 GS400 Service Repair Manual PDF

2002 Lexus ES300 Repair Manual and Electrical Wiring Diagram PDF

See All

Get your hands on the Complete Lexus Factory Workshop Software

Download now

9.99

Summary of Content

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 QUICK GUIDE 9 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 69 4 PHONE 147 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 211 6 AIR CONDITIONING 315 7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 329 8 INFORMATION 343 9 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 369 10 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 397 INDEX 413 1 RX450h/350_Navi_U Introduction NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times. The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the navigation system differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data available at the time of producing this document. NAVIGATION SYSTEM The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals and other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination. The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present starting location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes. The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the system will guide you there. The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down. Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to pages 144 through 146. 2 RX450h/350_Navi_U IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with the following marks. CAUTION ●This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE ● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment. SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.” Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). 3 RX450h/350_Navi_U HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 1. DESTINATION SEARCH 2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE When “Map” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the map screen will be displayed. The map location of the selected destination can be set as a destination. 1 Scroll the map to the desired point. z If a destination has already been set, “Go to ” and “Add to Route” will be displayed. “Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one. INFORMATION ●The route for returning may not be the same as that for going. ●The route guidance to the destination may not be the shortest route nor a route without traffic congestion. ●Route guidance may not be available if there is no road data for the specified location. No. Name Description Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained. Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained. Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described. Information Useful information for the user is described. ■ INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETS NEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles Example When the “POWER”*1 <“ENGINE START STOP”>*2 switch is in ACCESSORY or ON*1 *2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating. *1: Vehicles with hybrid system *2: Vehicles with gasoline engine 4 RX450h/350_Navi_U SAFETY INSTRUCTION To use this system in the safest possible manner, follow all the safety tips shown below. This system is intended to assist in reaching the destination and, if used properly, can do so. The driver is solely responsible for the safe operation of your vehicle and the safety of your passengers. Do not use any feature of this system to the extent it becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first priority while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learn how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire Navigation System Owner’s Manual to make sure you understand the system. Do not allow other people to use this system until they have read and understood the instructions in this manual. For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. Only when the vehicle is not moving, can the destination and route selection be done. CAUTION ●For safety, the driver should not operate the navigation system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an accident. ●While driving, be sure to obey the traffic regulations and maintain awareness of the road conditions. If a traffic sign on the road has been changed, route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way street. While driving, listen to the voice instructions as much as possible and glance at the screen briefly and only when it is safe. However, do not totally rely on voice guidance. Use it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, or non-voice guidance. The data in the system may occasionally be incomplete. Road conditions, including driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore, before following any instructions from the system, look to see whether the instruction can be done safely and legally. This system cannot warn about such things as the safety of an area, condition of streets, and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive into it. Under no circumstances is this system a substitute for the driver’s personal judgement. Use this system only in locations where it is legal to do so. Some states/provinces may have laws prohibiting the use of video and navigation screens next to the driver. 5 RX450h/350_Navi_U TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 QUICK GUIDE 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION..................... 10 1. DESTINATION SEARCH............................ 70 Remote Touch........................................................... 10 MAP SCREEN......................................................... 12 REGISTERING HOME....................................... 14 REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS ................................................. 16 OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE.................................. 18 SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION ......................................... 19 DESTINATION SEARCH ................................ 70 STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ...............89 2. FUNCTION INDEX ..................................... 20 NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX.........................................20 3. QUICK REFERENCE.................................. 22 “Menu” SCREEN ................................................... 22 “Destination” SCREEN........................................24 “Setup” SCREEN....................................................26 “Information” SCREEN........................................28 2 BASIC FUNCTION 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ............................................... 32 INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................32 HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch .............34 INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION.......................................................36 SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ..................................39 MAP SCREEN OPERATION.......................... 41 2. SETUP................................................................ 52 GENERAL SETTINGS .......................................52 VOICE SETTINGS ...............................................65 6 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ................................... 93 ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN .................... 93 TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS............................................................. 96 DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION .................................................. 99 SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS.............................................. 100 SETTING ROUTE............................................... 102 3. ADDRESS BOOK..........................................111 NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................111 4. SETUP ...............................................................127 DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS............................................................127 VEHICLE SETTINGS.........................................137 5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM).......................................................144 LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM................................................................144 4 PHONE 1. PHONE OPERATION................................148 QUICK REFERENCE .......................................148 PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ........................150 REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE .............156 CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ..........161 RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE.................................................................168 TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE.........169 Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION........................................................ 172 2. SETUP .............................................................. 175 PHONE SETTINGS ........................................... 175 Bluetooth® SETTINGS...................................... 197 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION..............................................212 QUICK REFERENCE........................................212 SOME BASICS .....................................................214 RADIO OPERATION .......................................221 HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION............................................. 224 RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST) ......229 RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST)...............................234 DVD PLAYER OPERATION.......................235 USB MEMORY OPERATION ...................256 iPod OPERATION ............................................ 262 Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION ...........269 REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES .................................... 279 AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES) .......................... 300 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS....................................302 1 2 3 4 5 6 2. SETUP ..............................................................312 AUDIO SETTINGS ............................................ 312 7 8 9 10 7 RX450h/350_Navi_U TABLE OF CONTENTS 6 AIR CONDITIONING 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION ............................................. 316 QUICK REFERENCE ....................................... 316 SOME BASICS.....................................................318 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION..................................................... 319 7 9 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW..................... 370 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW....................... 370 TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE................371 TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM................. 376 TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM.................................................... 379 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ............................................330 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM................. 330 NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY) ........................................335 EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS ......336 COMMAND LIST..............................................337 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION...................380 APPS ........................................................................380 Destination Assist................................................ 387 eDestination...........................................................389 Lexus Insider.......................................................... 392 2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION.... 341 MOBILE ASSISTANT ....................................... 341 8 INFORMATION 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY...................... 344 FUEL CONSUMPTION.................................344 MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA .....................................346 2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW ..............348 XM SERVICES ................................................... 348 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION ............. 351 XM Sports ............................................................... 351 XM Stocks..............................................................354 XM Fuel Prices.....................................................357 XM NavWeather™............................................. 361 XM NavTraffic® ..................................................365 4. SETUP ............................................................. 368 XM SETTINGS ................................................... 368 8 RX450h/350_Navi_U LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 10 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM........398 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ...........398 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS .............................................400 THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW............ 402 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST............... 404 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST....................404 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING.............................................................. 410 INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................... 414 1 QUICK GUIDE 1 1 NAVIGATION OPERATION 1. Remote Touch ............................................... 10 2 2. MAP SCREEN.............................................. 12 3. REGISTERING HOME............................. 14 3 4. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS....................................... 16 4 5. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE......................... 18 6. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION ......................................... 19 5 6 2 FUNCTION INDEX 1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX............................... 20 7 3 QUICK REFERENCE 8 1. “Menu” SCREEN........................................ 22 2. “Destination” SCREEN............................. 24 9 3. “Setup” SCREEN ........................................ 26 4. “Information” SCREEN............................. 28 10 9 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 1. Remote Touch 10 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION No. Name Function Page Press to display the “Menu” screen. 22 “ · ” button Press to change the scale of the map and to scroll the list screen. 34, 37, 49 “MAP/VOICE” button Press to repeat a voice guidance, cancel the screen scroll, start guidance, and display the current position. 41 Remote Touch knob Move in the desired direction to select a function, letter and map screen button. Press to enter the selected function, letter or map screen button. 34 1 QUICK GUIDE “MENU” button 11 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 2. MAP SCREEN No. Name Function Page North-up or heading-up symbol This symbol indicates whether the map orientation is set to north-up or heading-up. Selecting this symbol changes the map orientation. Both northup and heading-up symbols display the vehicles direction as a letter (e.g. N for north). 51 Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 49 Zoom out button Select to reduce the map scale. 49 “ Off” Select to obtain a broader view. Some of the buttons on the screen will not be displayed. They are displayed again by selecting “On ”. 133 12 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION No. Name Page “Mark” Select to register the current position or the cursor position as an address book entry. 43 “Route” Select to change the route. 100, 102 “Show on Map” Select to browse information about guidance route, to set the POI (Point of Interest) icons to be displayed on the screen, to record the route, etc. 107, 366, 391 Zoom in button Select to magnify the map scale. 49 Foot print map button Select to display the foot print map and the building information. 50 “Map Mode” Select to display the “Map Mode” screen. 46 Distance and time to destination Select to display the distance, estimated travel and arrival time to the destination. 99 XM indicator This mark is displayed when XM information is received. 364, 366 “GPS” mark (Global Positioning System) Whenever the vehicle is receiving signals from the GPS, this mark is displayed. 144 1 QUICK GUIDE Function “PWR·VOL” knob: Press and hold for 3 seconds or more to turn off the screen and restart the navigation system. Do this when the vehicle-mounted device response is extremely slow. INFORMATION ●Remove dirt from the display and its surrounding area by lightly wiping with a soft, dry cloth, such as a cloth used for cleaning glasses with plastic lenses. Scrubbing too hard or using a hard cloth could scratch the display. Also, the display is treated with a coating, and could be damaged by coming into contact with benzine or alkaline solution. ●When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate the screen without polarized sunglasses. 13 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 3. REGISTERING HOME 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Destination” and press the Remote Touch knob. 3 Select “Go Home” and press the Remote Touch knob. If a home address has not been registered, it can be registered by selecting “Go Home”. 14 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 Select “Yes” and press the Remote Touch knob. 5 There are 4 different methods to search your home. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) 6 Select “Enter” and press the Remote Touch knob. The “Edit Home” screen is displayed. 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 7 Select “OK” and press the Remote Touch knob. 1 QUICK GUIDE Registration of home is complete. Home can also be registered by selecting “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. (See “REGISTERING HOME” on page 112.) The name, location, phone number and icon can be changed. (See “EDITING HOME” on page 113.) The registered points can be used on the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME” on page 71.) 15 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 4. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Destination” and press the Remote Touch knob. 3 Select one of the preset destination buttons and press the Remote Touch knob. A preset destination can be set to any preset destination button that has not yet been set. 16 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 Select “Yes” and press the Remote Touch knob. 5 There are 4 different methods to search preset destinations. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) 6 Select “Enter” and press the Remote Touch knob. The “Edit Preset Destination” screen is displayed. 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 7 Select “OK” and press the Remote Touch knob. 1 QUICK GUIDE Registration of preset destinations is complete. Preset destinations can also be registered by selecting “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. (See “REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 114.) The name, location, phone number and icon can be changed. (See “EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 115.) The registered points can be used on the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 71.) 17 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 5. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 4 Select “Go to ” and press the Remote Touch knob. The navigation system performs a search for the route. 2 Select “Destination” and press the Remote Touch knob. 3 There are 11 different methods to search destinations. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) Page 1 Page 2 18 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 Select “OK” and press the Remote Touch knob. Then start driving. Routes other than the one recommended can also be selected. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) Guidance to the destination is displayed on the screen and can be heard via voice guidance. 1. NAVIGATION OPERATION 6. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 4 Select “OK” and press the Remote Touch knob. Then start driving. 1 Select “Destination” and press the Remote Touch knob. 3 Select “Go Home” and press the Remote Touch knob. “Go Home” can be used if your home address has been registered. (To register home, see “REGISTERING HOME” on page 112.) Your home address is set as the destination. The navigation system performs a search for the route. 19 RX450h/350_Navi_U QUICK GUIDE 2 Routes other than the one recommended can also be selected. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) Guidance to the destination is displayed on the screen and can be heard via voice guidance. 2. FUNCTION INDEX 1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX Map Displaying maps Page Viewing the map screen 12 Displaying the current position 41 Viewing the current position vicinity map 42 Changing the scale 49 Changing the map orientation 51 Displaying Points of Interest 107 Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 99 Selecting the map mode 46 Deleting map screen buttons 133 Displaying traffic information 365 Searching destinations Page Searching the destination 70 Changing the selected search area 70 Operating the map location of the selected destination 89 Route guidance Before starting route guidance Page Setting the destination 89 Viewing alternative routes 90 Starting route guidance 89 Before starting or during route guidance Page Viewing the route 89 Adding destinations 100 Changing the route 102 Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 99 20 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. FUNCTION INDEX During route guidance Page 106 Adjusting route guidance volume 67 Deleting the destination 101 Displaying the entire route map 103 1 QUICK GUIDE Pausing route guidance Useful functions Address book Page Registering address book entries 116 Marking icons on the map 118 Information Displaying vehicle maintenance Hands-free system (for cellular phone) Page 137 Page Initiating Bluetooth® 150 Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 161 Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 168 Voice command system Operating the system with your voice Page 330 21 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE 1. “Menu” SCREEN Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen. 22 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE No. Name “Destination” Function Select to display the “Destination” screen. Page 14, 16, 18, 19, 24, 70, 387, 389 Select to display the “Information” screen. For vehicles sold in Canada, “Info” is used instead of “Info/Apps”. “Display” Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the display off, etc. 39 1 QUICK GUIDE “Info/Apps” (“Info”) 28, 344, 346, 351, 354, 357, 361, 365, 380, 383, 392 26, 52, 65, 111, 127, 137, 175, 197, 312, 368, 395, 410 “Setup” Select to display the “Setup” screen. “Phone” Select to display the hands-free operation screen. 156 “Climate” Select to display the air conditioning control screen. 318 “Media” Select to display the media control screen. 216 “Radio” Select to display the radio control screen. 216 23 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE 2. “Destination” SCREEN The “Destination” screen enables a destination search. Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Destination” to display the “Destination” screen. No. Name Function Page “Address” Select to input a house number and the street address using the input keys. 72 “Point of Interest” Select one of the POIs that have already been stored in the system’s database. 75, 389 “Destination Assist” Select to provide you with live assistance finding destinations via the Lexus Enform with Safety Connect response center. 82, 387 “Previous Destinations” Select a destination from any of the last 100 previously set destinations and from the previous starting point. 82 “Del.Dest.” Select to delete set destinations. 88 24 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE No. Name Function Page “Address Book” Select the desired location from a registered entry in “Address book”. (To register address book entries, see “REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on page 117.) 83 “Emergency” Select one of the 4 categories of emergency service points that have already been stored in the system’s database. 83 “Intersection & Freeway” Select to enter the names of 2 intersecting streets or a freeway (interstate) entrance or exit. This is helpful if only the general vicinity, not the specific address, is known. 84 “Map” Select to enable setting a destination by specifying a location on the map screen. 87 “Coordinates” Select to enter latitude and longitude coordinates. 87 Preset destination buttons Select one of the 5 preset destination points as a destination. If a preset destination point has not been registered, a message will be displayed asking if it is desirable to set a destination to the preset screen button. (To register a preset destination, see “REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 114.) 71 “Go Home” Select your personal home address without having to enter the address each time. If a home address has not been registered, a message will be displayed and the setting screen will automatically appear. (To register home, see “REGISTERING HOME” on page 112.) 71 1 QUICK GUIDE 25 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE 3. “Setup” SCREEN The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen. 26 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE No. Name Page “General” Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automatic screen change settings, etc. 52 “Voice” Select to set the voice guidance settings. 65 “Navigation” Select to set home, preset destinations, address book, areas to avoid, etc. or to delete previous destinations. 111 “Vehicle” Select to set vehicle information such as maintenance information. 137 “Other” Select to set Lexus Insider, XM Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices. 368, 395 “Audio” Select to HD Radio™ channel and iPod settings. 312 “Bluetooth*” Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices. 197 “Phone” Select to set the phone sound, phonebook, message settings, etc. 175 1 QUICK GUIDE Function *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 27 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE 4. “Information” SCREEN This screen can be used to display the XM satellite system, fuel consumption, etc. Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps” (“Info”) to display the “Information” screen. 28 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. QUICK REFERENCE No. Name Function Page Select to display the “Apps” screen. 380, 383 “Fuel Consumption” Select to display the fuel consumption screen. 344 “Traffic Incidents” Select to display traffic incidents. 365 “Map Data” Select to display map data information. 346 “LEXUS Insider” Select to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 392 “XM NavWeather” Select to display weather information. 361 “XM Stocks” Select to display personally selected stocks information. 354 “XM Sports” Select to display personally selected sports teams information. 351 “XM Fuel Prices” Select to display current fuel prices and gas station locations information. 357 1 QUICK GUIDE “Apps” 29 RX450h/350_Navi_U 30 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION 1 1 BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 2 1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 32 2. HOW TO USE THE 3 Remote Touch ........................................... 34 3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN 4 OPERATION............................................ 36 4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ........................ 39 SCREEN SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT ............. 39 5 5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ................ 41 CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY....................... 41 SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION..................... 42 6 SWITCHING THE SCREENS ............................. 46 MAP SCALE................................................................. 49 FOOT PRINT MAP .................................................. 50 7 ORIENTATION OF THE MAP............................ 51 STANDARD MAP ICONS .................................... 51 8 2 SETUP 1. GENERAL SETTINGS.............................. 52 9 SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS........ 53 2. VOICE SETTINGS..................................... 65 10 SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS ................... 66 31 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 1. INITIAL SCREEN 1 When the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.  After a few seconds, the “CAUTION” screen will be displayed.  After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION” screen automatically switches to the map screen. (If a button other than the “MAP/ VOICE” button on the Remote Touch is pressed, the function’s corresponding screen will be displayed.)  Images shown on the initial screen can be changed to suit individual preferences. (See page 59.) CAUTION ●When the vehicle is stopped with the hybrid system operating , always apply the parking brake for safety. 32 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INFORMATION This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and shows dealer information (if registered) on the screen. When the vehicle reaches a previously set driving distance or date specified for a scheduled maintenance check, the “Maintenance Reminder” screen will be displayed when the navigation system is turned on. 2 BASIC FUNCTION  This screen goes off if the screen is not operated for several seconds.  To prevent this screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Display This Message Again”.  To register maintenance information, see “MAINTENANCE” on page 137. 33 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch This navigation system can be operated by the Remote Touch when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. 1 Use the Remote Touch knob to select the desired button on the screen. 2 To select the button on the screen, press the Remote Touch knob. Once a button has been selected, the screen will change. 34 RX450h/350_Navi_U  When the pointer moves close to a button, it will be automatically pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be adjusted. (See page 63.)  The pointer will disappear from the screen if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operation of the Remote Touch knob will cause the pointer to reappear.  Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch to zoom in on the map screen and the “ ” button to zoom out. These buttons can also be used to scroll up and down on list screens.  Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to set a destination or adjust settings for the audio/video system, air conditioning system, etc.  The map screen can be returned to by pressing the “MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote Touch. CAUTION ●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as this may cause an injury. ●Be careful when touching the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION NOTICE ●Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop functioning. ●Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the knob may bend or break off. ●Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning. ●Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob. ●If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly. 2 BASIC FUNCTION INFORMATION ●Under extremely cold conditions, the Remote Touch knob may react slowly. 35 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION When searching for an address or name, or entering data, letters and numbers can be input via the screen.  Keyboard layout can be changed. (See page 58.) TO INPUT LETTERS AND NUMBERS 1 Select “A-Z” to display the alphabet  On certain letter entry screens, letters can be entered in upper or lower case. Icon Function Select to enter in lower case. Select to enter in upper case. TO INPUT SYMBOLS 1 Select “Other” to display symbol keys. keys. 2 Select the keys directly to enter letters 2 Select the symbol keys directly to enter symbols. or numbers. : Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue erasing characters. 36 RX450h/350_Navi_U : Select to erase one symbol. Select and hold to continue erasing symbols. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION TO DISPLAY THE LIST 1 Select “OK” to search for an address or a name. LIST SCREEN OPERATION When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through the list. 2 Icon Function Select to skip to the next or previous page. Select and hold or to scroll through the displayed list. This indicates the screen’s position. INFORMATION ●The number of matching items is shown on the right side of the screen. If the number of matching items is more than 999, the system displays “” on the screen. displayed If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long to display. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. INFORMATION ●The “ ” and “ ” buttons on the Remote Touch can be used to scroll up and down on list screens. 37 RX450h/350_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION  Matching items from the database are listed even if the entered address or name is incomplete.  The list will be displayed automatically if the maximum number of characters is entered or the number of matching items is 5 or less. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION SORTING The order of a list displayed on the screen can be rearranged. 1 Select “Sort”. Screen button Function “Distance” Select to sort in order of distance from the current position. “Date” Select to sort in order of date. “Category” Select to sort in order of category. “Icon” Select to sort in order of icon. “Name” Select to sort in order of name. “Brand” Select to sort in order of brand name. (XM functions) “Price” Select to sort in order of price. (XM functions) 2 Select the desired sorting criteria. 38 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT The contrast and brightness of the screen display and the image the camera displays can be adjusted. The display can also be turned off, and/or changed to either day or night mode. (For information regarding audio/video screen adjustment, see “AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on page 246.) “Camera”: Select to adjust the image the camera displays. Adjusting the image the camera displays ADJUSTING SCREEN DISPLAY AND CAMERA SETTINGS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. “Map·Menu”: Select to return to the screen display settings. 2 Select “Display”. 39 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION SCREEN SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT Adjusting the screen display 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION CONTRAST AND BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE The contrast and brightness of the screen can be adjusted according to the brightness of your surroundings. The display can also be turned off. Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day or night mode. 1 Select “ ” or “ ” to select the desired function (“Contrast” or “Brightness”). 2 Select the desired screen button to adjust contrast and brightness. Screen button Function “Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen. “Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the contrast of the screen. “Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the screen. “Brightness” “-” Select to darken the screen. 3 After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.  The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is selected. To turn the screen back on, press any button on the audio panel or on the Remote Touch. The selected screen appears. 40 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1 To display the screen in day mode, even with the headlight switch on, select “Day Mode”. INFORMATION ●If the screen is set to day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized even with the hybrid system turned off. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY When starting the navigation system, the current position is displayed first. This screen displays the current position and a map of the surrounding area. INFORMATION  The current position mark ( ) appears in the center or bottom center of the map screen.  A street name will appear on the bottom of the screen, depending on the scale of the map ( ).  The screen can be returned to this map screen that shows the current position at any time, from any screen by pressing the “MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote Touch.  To correct the current position manually, see page 134. 41 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION ●While driving, the current position mark is fixed on the screen and the map moves. ●The current position is automatically set as the vehicle receives signals from the GPS (Global Positioning System). If the current position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle receives signals from the GPS. ●After 12-volt battery disconnection, or on a new vehicle, the current position may not be correct. As soon as the system receives signals from the GPS, the correct current position is displayed. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION When any point on the map is selected, that point moves to the center of the screen and is shown by the cursor mark ( ).  Use the scroll feature to move the desired point to the center of the screen for looking at a point on the map that is different from the current position.  To scroll over the map, place the pointer in a position near the desired destination and then press and hold the Remote Touch knob. The map will continue scrolling in that direction until the knob is released.  A street name, city name, etc. of the selected point will be shown, depending on the scale of the map ( ). Distance from the current position to will also be shown ( ).  After the screen is scrolled, the map remains centered at the selected location until another function is activated. The current position mark will continue to move along your actual route and may move off the screen. When the “MAP/ VOICE” button on the Remote Touch is pressed, the current position mark returns to the center of the screen and the map moves as the vehicle proceeds along the designated route.  When the scroll feature is used, the current position mark may disappear from the screen. Press the “MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote Touch to display the current position on the map screen. TO SET THE CURSOR POSITION AS A DESTINATION A specific point on the map can be set as a destination using the scroll function. 1 Select “Enter ”.  The screen changes and displays the map location of the selected destination and the route preference. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) 42 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION TO REGISTER THE CURSOR POSITION AS AN ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET Address book entry registration enables easy access to a specific point. 1 Select “Mark”. 2 ■ POI INFORMATION 2 This screen is displayed. When the cursor is set on a POI icon, the name and “Info” are displayed at the top of the screen. 1 Select “Info”.  The registered point is shown by map. on the  To change the icon or name, etc., see “EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on page 117. INFORMATION ●Up to 100 address book entries can be registered. If there is an attempt to register more than 100 address book entries, an error message will appear. 43 RX450h/350_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION  To display information about an icon, set the cursor on it. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 2 Information such as the name, address, position and phone number are displayed. ■ ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY INFORMATION When the cursor is set on an address book entry icon, the name and “Info” are displayed at the top of the screen. 1 Select “Info”.  If “Enter ” is selected, the cursor position will be set as a destination.  If a destination has already been set, “Go Directly” and “Add to Route” will be displayed. “Go Directly”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.  To register this POI as an address book entry, select “Mark”. (See “REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on page 117.)  If is selected, the registered phone number can be called.  The desired POI can be displayed on the map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI ICONS” on page 107.) 44 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 Information such as the name, address, position and phone number are displayed. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION  If “Enter ” is selected, the cursor position will be set as a destination.  If a destination has already been set, “Go Directly” and “Add to Route” will be displayed. “Go Directly”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination. When the cursor is set on a destination icon, the name and “Info” are displayed on the top of the screen. 1 Select “Info”. 2 2 Information such as the name, address, position and phone number are displayed.  To delete a destination, select “Delete”.  If is selected, the registered phone number can be called. 45 RX450h/350_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION  To edit an address book entry, select “Edit”. (See “EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on page 117.)  To delete an address book entry, select “Delete”.  If is selected, the registered phone number can be called. ■ DESTINATION INFORMATION 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ■ XM NavTraffic® TEXT INFORMATION When the XM NavTraffic® icon on the map screen is selected, the XM NavTraffic® information bar will appear on the upper part of the screen. SWITCHING THE SCREENS Any of the screen configurations can be selected. 1 Select “Map Mode”. 1 Select “Info”. 2 Select the screen buttons to select the desired configuration. 2 Traffic information will be displayed on the screen.  Depending on the conditions, certain screen configuration buttons cannot be selected.  To display detailed traffic event information, select “Detail”. 46 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION Function “Map Only” Select to display the single map screen. (See page 47.) “Turn List” Select to display the turn list screen. (See page 95.) “Intersection” Select to display the intersection guidance screen or the guidance screen on the freeway. (See page 94.) “Audio” Select to display the audio screen. (See page 47.) “Fuel Consumption” Select to display the fuel consumption screen. (See page 48.) “Other Information” Select to display the following 4 screen configurations: “Dual map”, “Compass”, “Turn-byTurn Arrow” and “Freeway Exit List”. “Dual map” Select to display the dual map screen. (See page 48.) “Compass” Select to display the compass mode screen. (See page 49.) “Turn-byTurn Arrow” Select to display the turnby-turn arrow screen. (See page 95.) “Freeway Exit List” Select to display the freeway exit list screen. (See page 93.) SCREEN CONFIGURATIONS ■ MAP ONLY This is a regular map screen. 2  The screen shows the single map.  While on a different screen, selecting “Map Only” will display the single map screen. ■ AUDIO The audio screen and the map screen are displayed.  Information on the current radio station or track is displayed.  If a different screen is displayed, select “Audio” on the “Map Mode” screen.  For audio system operation, refer to “AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION”. (See page 212.) 47 RX450h/350_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION Screen button 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ■ FUEL CONSUMPTION ■ EDITING RIGHT MAP The fuel consumption screen and the map screen are displayed. The right side map can be edited by selecting any point on the right side map. 1 Select the desired screen button.  Selecting “ ” or “ ” allows selection of the desired mode (“Energy Monitor”*, “Trip Information” or “Past Record”). *: Vehicles with hybrid system  If a different screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Map Mode” screen.  For an explanation on each fuel consumption mode, refer to “FUEL CONSUMPTION”. (See page 344.) ■ DUAL MAP The map screen can be split into two.  The following procedures can be performed on this screen: No. Function Changing the orientation of the map Displaying POI icons Showing XM NavTraffic® information (See page 366.) Displaying eDestination icons (See page 391.) Changing the map scale 2 Select “OK” when editing is completed.  The screen returns to the dual map screen.  This screen shows the dual map. The map on the left is the main map.  While on a different screen, selecting “Dual map” will display the dual map screen. 48 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ■ COMPASS The current position is indicated with a compass. MAP SCALE 1 Select or to change the scale of the map screen. 2  While on a different screen, selecting “Compass” will display the compass mode screen. INFORMATION ●The destination mark is displayed in the direction of the destination. When driving, refer to the longitude and latitude coordinates, and the compass, to make sure that the vehicle is headed in the direction of the destination. ●When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen changes to the compass mode screen.  The scale bar and indicator at the bottom of the screen indicate the map scale menu. The scale range is from 150 ft. (50 m) to 250 miles (400 km).  Select and hold or to continue changing the scale of the map screen.  The scale of the map screen can be changed by selecting the scale bar directly. This function is not available while driving. INFORMATION ●Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch to zoom in on the map screen and the “ ” button to zoom out. ●The map scale is displayed under the north-up or heading-up symbol at the top left of the screen. ●When the map scale is at the maximum range of 250 miles (400 km), is not shown. When the map scale is at the minimum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is not shown. In areas where the foot print map is available the map scale changes from to when at the minimum range. 49 RX450h/350_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION  Information about the destination, current position and a compass is displayed on the screen. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION FOOT PRINT MAP For the area which is covered by the foot print map (Some areas in the following cities: Detroit, Chicago, N.Y., L.A), you can switch to the foot print map on a scale of 75 ft. (25 m). TO SWITCH TO THE FOOT PRINT MAP TO DISPLAY BUILDING INFORMATION Information is available only for buildings for which information is recorded on the map data. 1 Select “Info” while the foot print map is displayed. changes into when the map is scaled down to 150 ft. (50 m). 1 To display the foot print map, select .  Details of POIs in some buildings may be displayed.  For detailed POI information, select the building name. Details of the selected POIs can be seen.  To delete the foot print map display, select . INFORMATION ●If the map or the current position is moved to the area which is not covered by the foot print map, the screen scale automatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m). ●On the foot print map, a one way street is displayed by . ●It is not possible to perform scrolling on the foot print map while driving. Building footprints in the database were created and provided by MAPMASTER. 50 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ORIENTATION OF THE MAP The orientation of the map can be changed from north-up to heading-up by selecting the orientation symbol at the top left of the screen. 1 Select or . North-up screen STANDARD MAP ICONS Icon Name Island Park 2 Industry BASIC FUNCTION Business facility Airport Heading-up screen Military University Hospital Stadium : North-up symbol Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel, north is always up. : Heading-up symbol The direction of vehicle travel is always up. Shopping mall Golf  Both the north-up and heading-up symbols display the vehicles direction as a letter (e.g. N for north). 51 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP 1. GENERAL SETTINGS Used for language selection and the on/ off settings of operation sounds and automatic screen change, etc. 4 Select the items to be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 Select “Save”. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “General”. 52 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS No. Function Select to change time zones, set daylight saving time and set automatic adjustment of the clock. (See “CLOCK SETTINGS” on page 54.) Select to change the language. (See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page 56.) Select to change the screen button color. (See “SELECTING A BUTTON COLOR” on page 57.) Select to change the keyboard layout. (See “SELECTING A KEYBOARD LAYOUT” on page 58.) Select to customize the startup image. (See “CHANGING THE STARTUP IMAGE” on page 59.) Select to customize the screen off image. (See “CHANGING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGE” on page 61.) Select to set automatic screen changes from the audio/air conditioning control screen to the previous screen to “On” or “Off”. If “On” is selected, the screen will automatically return to the previous screen from the audio/ air conditioning control screen after 20 seconds.  On this screen, the following functions can be performed: 53 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION Select to change the distance unit. (See “UNIT OF MEASUREMENT” on page 57.) 2. SETUP No. Function Select to turn the selection sounds “On” or “Off”. Select to turn the pointer sounds “On” or “Off”. Select to turn the error sounds “On” or “Off”. Select to adjust the pointer sound volume. (See “POINTER SOUND VOLUME SETTINGS” on page 62.) Select to adjust the strength of the pull from the buttons to the pointer. (See “SETTING A FEEDBACK FORCE” on page 63.) Select to delete personal data. (See “DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on page 63.) Select to update program versions. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. Select to update gracenote database versions. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. 54 RX450h/350_Navi_U CLOCK SETTINGS Change time zones, set daylight saving time and set automatic adjustment of the clock. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Clock”. 2. SETUP 4 Select the items to be set. ■ TIME ZONE A time zone can be selected and GMT can be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. No. Function tings” screen. 4 Select “Time Zone”. Select to change the time zone. (See “TIME ZONE” on page 55.) Select “On” or “Off” for daylight saving time. Select “On” or “Off” for automatic adjustment of the clock. (See “MANUAL CLOCK SETTING” on page 56.) 5 Select the desired time zone. 5 Select “Save”.  If “Other” is selected, the zone can be adjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” to adjust the time zone and then select “OK”. 6 Select “Save”. 55 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION  On this screen, the following functions can be performed: 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Clock” on the “General Set- 2. SETUP ■ MANUAL CLOCK SETTING When “Auto Adjust Clock” is turned “Off”, the clock can be manually adjusted. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Clock” on the “General Set- SELECTING A LANGUAGE The language can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Language”. tings” screen. 4 Select “Auto Adjust Clock”. Screen button Function “Hours” “+”, “-” Select “+” to set the time forward one hour and “-” to set the time back one hour. “Minutes” “+”, “-” Select “+” to set the time forward one minute and “-” to set the time back one minute. “Minutes” “:00” Select to round to the nearest hour*. 4 Select the desired screen button. *e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00 1:30 to 1:59  2:00 5 Select “Yes”. 5 Select “Save”. 6 Select “Save”. 56 RX450h/350_Navi_U  The previous screen will be displayed. 2. SETUP UNIT OF MEASUREMENT Distance unit can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Unit of Measurement”. SELECTING A BUTTON COLOR The color of the screen buttons can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 4 Select “km” or “mile”. 4 Select the desired screen button color.  The previous screen will be displayed. 5 Select “Save”.  This function is available only in English or Spanish. To change language, see “SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page 56.  The previous screen will be displayed. 5 Select “Save”. 57 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Button Color”. 2. SETUP SELECTING A KEYBOARD LAYOUT ■ LAYOUT TYPE “ABC” type Keyboard layout can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Keyboard Layout”. “QWERTY” type 4 Select “ABC” or “QWERTY” of “Keyboard Layout” to change the keyboard layout.  The previous screen will be displayed. 5 Select “Save”. 58 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP CHANGING THE STARTUP IMAGE INFORMATION ●When saving the images to a USB, name the folder that the startup image is saved to “StartupImage” and name the folder that the screen off image is saved to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder names are not used, the navigation system cannot download the images. (The folder names are case sensitive.) ●The images file extension is JPG or JPEG. ●The images file name, including the file extension, can be up to 32 characters. ●Image files of 10 MB or less can be saved. ●Up to 3 images can be downloaded. 1 Pull up the lever to release the lock, and lift the armrest. 2 2 Open the cover and connect a USB memory.  Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on. 3 Close the console box. 4 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 5 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 59 RX450h/350_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION When the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed. An image can be copied from a USB memory and used as the startup image. (For information regarding the startup image, see “INITIAL SCREEN” on page 32.) ■ TRANSFERRING DATA 2. SETUP 6 Select “Customize Startup Image”. ■ SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGE 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen. 4 Select the desired image. 7 Select “Transfer”. 5 Select “Save”. 8 Select “Yes”. ■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen. 4 Select “Delete All”. 5 Select “Yes”. 60 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP CHANGING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGE Select “Screen Off” to turn off the screen. An image can be copied from a USB memory and can be set to display when “Screen Off” is selected. (For more information on “Screen Off”, see “SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on page 39.) 3 Close the console box. 4 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 5 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 6 Select “Customize Screen Off Image”. 2 BASIC FUNCTION ■ TRANSFERRING DATA 1 Pull up the lever to release the lock, and lift the armrest. 2 Open the cover and connect a USB 7 Select “Transfer”. 8 Select “Yes”. memory.  Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on. 61 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP ■ SETTING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGE 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. POINTER SOUND VOLUME SETTINGS The pointer sound volume can be adjusted. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Customize Screen Off Image” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 4 Select the desired image. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Pointer Sound Volume”. on the “General Settings” screen. 5 Select “Save”. ■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 4 Select the desired button. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings” screen. 4 Select “Delete All”. 5 Select “Yes”. 62 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 Select “OK”. 6 Select “Save”. 2. SETUP SETTING A FEEDBACK FORCE When the pointer moves close to a button, it will be automatically pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be adjusted. DELETING PERSONAL DATA 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Delete Personal Data”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. BASIC FUNCTION 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Feedback Force”. 4 Select “Delete”. 4 Select “+” or “-”. 5 Select “Yes”. 5 Select “OK”. 6 Select “Save”. 63 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP  The following personal data can be deleted or returned to their default settings: • Maintenance conditions • Maintenance information off setting • Address book • Areas to avoid • Previous points • Route guidance • Route trace • Phonebook data • Call history data • Speed dial data • Bluetooth® phone data • Phone sound settings • Phone display settings • Message settings • Audio/video setting • Bluetooth® audio setting • Startup image data • Screen off image data • Downloaded Apps INFORMATION ●This function is not available while driving. 64 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP 2. VOICE SETTINGS Voice guidance etc. can be set. 4 Select the items to be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 5 Select “Save”. BASIC FUNCTION 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Voice”. 65 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS No. Function The voice guidance volume can be adjusted or switched off. (See “VOICE VOLUME” on page 67.) Voice guidance during route guidance can be set to “On” or “Off”. Voice guidance during audio/video and/or air conditioning system use can be set to “On” or “Off”. Voice recognition prompts can be set to “On” or “Off”. This setting can also be changed on the “Shortcut Menu” screen. (See page 330.) When “On” is selected, the audio/ video and air conditioning systems can be operated using voice commands.  On this screen, the following functions can be performed: When using the traffic information function, voice guidance can be set to “On” or “Off”. (See “TRAFFIC INCIDENT WARNING” on page 67.) When using the XM NavWeather™ function, the severe weather warning can be set to “On” or “Off”.  To reset all setup items, select “Default”. 66 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP VOICE VOLUME The voice guidance volume can be adjusted or switched off. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select the desired level by selecting the Traffic congestion information can be received via voice guidance while being guided to the desired destination. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 2 Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “On” of “Traffic Incident Warning”.  If voice guidance is not needed, select “Off” to disable the feature. 4 Select “Save”. 4 Select “Save”. INFORMATION ●When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. (See page 366.) 67 RX450h/350_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION appropriate number. TRAFFIC INCIDENT WARNING 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 DESTINATION SEARCH 1. DESTINATION SEARCH........................ 70 SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA .................. 70 DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME.............. 71 DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS................................... 71 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address” ....... 72 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Point of Interest” ..................................................... 75 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Destination Assist”................................................ 82 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Previous Destinations”........................................ 82 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address Book” ....................................................... 83 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Emergency”............................................................. 83 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Intersection & Freeway”..................................... 84 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Map” ............... 87 DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Coordinates”............................................................ 87 DELETING SET DESTINATIONS.................... 88 2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ....... 89 68 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 2 ROUTE GUIDANCE 1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN............ 93 3 ADDRESS BOOK 1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS ...................... 111 2 SETTING UP THE “Home” ................................... 112 2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS ................................................. 96 SETTING UP THE “Preset Destinations”........ 114 SETTING UP THE “Address Book” .................. 116 3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION ........................................ 99 SETTING UP THE “Areas to Avoid”................. 121 DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS................................................... 125 4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS.................................... 100 ADDING DESTINATIONS ............................... 100 REORDERING DESTINATIONS................... 100 4 SETUP 1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................ 127 5. SETTING ROUTE .................................... 102 SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................................ 128 DETOUR SETTING ................................................ 102 ROUTE PREFERENCE......................................... 104 6 2. VEHICLE SETTINGS .............................. 137 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 137 PAUSING AND RESUMING GUIDANCE ........................................................... 106 7 VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION ......................... 142 SHOW ON MAP..................................................... 107 ROUTE TRACE ......................................................... 110 4 5 DELETING DESTINATIONS ............................. 101 ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................. 103 3 5 8 GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) 9 1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM.................... 144 10 69 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH 1. DESTINATION SEARCH 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA The selected state (province) can be changed to set a destination from a different state (province) by using “Address”, “Point of Interest” or “Intersection & Freeway”. 1 Select “Change State/Province” to dis2 Select “Destination”. 3 This screen is displayed. play a list of the states/provinces/territories of the United States and Canada.  For map database information and updates, see “MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA” on page 346.  If a state (province) has not been selected yet, “Select State/Province” is displayed. 2 Select the desired state (province).  One of 11 different methods can be used to search a destination. (See pages 71 through 87.) INFORMATION ●When searching a destination, the response to the screen button may be slow. 70 RX450h/350_Navi_U  The previous screen will be displayed. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 3 Select “Go Home”. 3 Select any of the preset destination but- Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) screen. Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) screen. tons (1-5). 3 4 Select “OK”.  To use this function, it is necessary to set a home address. (To register home, see page 112.) INFORMATION ●If a home address has not been registered, a message confirming if it is desirable to set a home will be displayed, and the setting screen will appear. ●Guidance starts from the current position to the set home address if “OK” is selected even while driving.  The selected preset destination point is set as the destination. The navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) 4 Select “OK”.  To use this function, it is necessary to set preset destinations to the preset screen buttons (1-5). (See “REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 114.) INFORMATION ●If a preset destination point has not been registered, a message confirming if it is desirable to set a preset destination will be displayed, and the setting screen will appear. ●Guidance starts from the current position to the preset destination point if “OK” is selected even while driving. 71 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM  Your home address is set as the destination. The navigation system performs a search for the route. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address” There are 2 methods to search a destination by address: (a) Search by city (b) Search by street address 1 Press the “MENU” button on the SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 2 Select “Address” on the “Destination” screen. 3 Select “City”. Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Address” on the “Destination” screen. 4 Select the desired search method. 4 Input a city name. 5 Select the screen button of the desired city name from the displayed list. 72 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH 6 Input the street name and select “OK”. ■ SEARCHING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES 1 Select “Last 5 Cities”. 7 When the desired street name is found, select the corresponding screen button. 2 Select the screen button of the desired 3 city name from the displayed list. 8 Input a house number. NAVIGATION SYSTEM  When the desired street name is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.)  The current screen changes to the screen for inputting a street name. (See “SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on page 72.) INFORMATION ●If the navigation system has never been used, this function will not be available.  If the same address exists in more than 1 city, the current screen changes to the address list screen. 73 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCH BY STREET ADDRESS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 6 When the desired street name is found, select the corresponding screen button. Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 2 Select “Address” on the “Destination” screen. 3 Select “Street Address”. 4 Select numbers directly on the screen to input the house number.  When the desired street name is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.)  If the same address exists in more than 1 city, a screen requesting the city name to be input or selected will be displayed. 7 Input a city name.  After inputting the house number, select “OK” to display the screen for inputting the street name. 5 Input the street name and select “OK”. 74 RX450h/350_Navi_U 8 Select the screen button of the desired city name from the displayed list. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH INFORMATION ●A street name can be searched using only the body part of its name. ●For example: S WESTERN AVE • A search can be performed by inputting “S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE” or “WESTERN”. SEARCH BY “Name” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen. 3 Select “Name” on the “Point of Interest” DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Point of Interest” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 4 Input the name of the POI. 3 5 Select the screen button of the desired destination. 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen. 4 Select the desired search method.  When the desired destination is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.)  When inputting the name of a specific POI, and there are 2 or more sites with the same name, the list screen is displayed. 75 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM There are 4 methods to search a destination by Points of Interest: (a) Search by name (b) Search by category (c) Search by phone # (d) Search by eDestination screen. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH 6 Select the screen button of the desired destination.  If the same name exists in more than 1 city, a search can be performed more easily using “City” or “Category”. (See “SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on page 72 and “SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES” on page 77.) ■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH 1 Select “City”. 2 Input the city name.  The desired POI can be displayed on the map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI ICONS” on page 107.)  To cancel the city setting, select “Any City”. INFORMATION ●To search for a facility name using multiple search words, put a space between each word. 76 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 Select the screen button of the desired city name from the displayed list. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH ■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES 1 Select “Category”. SEARCH BY “Category” The destination can be set by selecting the search point and the POI category. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen. 2 Select the screen button of the desired 3 Select “Category”. 3 category. NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4 This screen is displayed.  If the desired POI category is on the screen, select its screen button to display a detailed list of the POI category.  If the desired POI category is not on the screen, select “List All Categories” to list all POI categories.  On this screen, the following operations can be performed: No. Function Select to set the search point from near the current position.  When the desired category is selected, the POI name list screen is displayed. Select to set the search point from along the selected route. Select to set the search point from near a city center. Select to set the search point from near a destination. 77 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH INFORMATION ●The names of POIs located within approximately 200 miles (320 km) from the selected search point can be displayed. ■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROM NEAR CITY CENTER 1 Select “Near a City Center in XX*”. 2 Input the city center name. ■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROM NEAR HERE 1 Select “Near Here”.  The search point is set at the current position, and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page 80.) ■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROM ALONG MY ROUTE 3 Select the screen button of the desired city center name. 1 Select “Along My Route”.  The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page 80.)  The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page 80.) *: XX represents the selected search area name. 78 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH ■ SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES ■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROM NEAR A DESTINATION 1 Select “Near a City Center in XX*”. 2 Select “Last 5 Cities”. 1 Select “Near a Destination”. 2 Select the screen button of the desired destination. 3 3 Select the screen button of the desired  The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page 80.)  The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page 80.) *: XX represents the selected search area name. 79 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM city center name. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH ■ TO SEARCH FOR POIs NEAR THE SEARCH POINT 3 Select the screen button of the desired item. When the search point is set, the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. 1 Select the desired POI category.  If the desired POI category is not on the screen, select “List All Categories” to list all POI categories.  If “Favorite POI Categories” is selected, a search can be performed using the 6 POIs that have been previously set. For more details, see “POI CATEGORY CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)” on page 132. 2 Select the desired POI category from the list. 80 RX450h/350_Navi_U  When the desired item is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) 1. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCH BY “Phone #” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen. 3 Select “Phone #” on the “Point of Interest” screen. 4 Input a phone number.  To set an address book entry as a destination using the phone number, the number must already be registered with the address book entry. (See page 116.) INFORMATION ●If there is no match for the phone number input, a list of identical numbers with different area codes will be displayed. SEARCH BY “eDestination” 3 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen. 5 After inputting a phone number, select “OK”.  When a phone number is input, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.)  If there is more than 1 site with the same number, the following screen will be displayed. 3 Select “eDestination” on the “Point of Interest” screen.  With the eDestination feature, you can go online, via the Lexus.com owner’s Web site, to select and organize destinations of your choice and then wirelessly send them to your vehicle’s navigation system. Up to 200 locations can be stored online and accessed or updated at any time. Locations can be organized into up to 20 folders. (See “eDestination” on page 389.) 81 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Destination Assist” DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Previous Destinations” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 3 Select “Destination Assist” on the 3 Select “Previous Destinations” on the  Destination Assist provides you with live assistance for finding destinations via the Lexus Enform with Safety Connect response center. You can request either a specific business, address, or ask for help locating your desired destination by category, such as restaurants, gas stations, shopping centers or other points of interest (POI). After you tell the agent your choice of destination, its coordinates are sent wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation system. (See “Destination Assist” on page 387.) 4 Select the screen button of the desired Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) screen. “Destination” screen. Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) screen. “Destination” screen. destination.  The previous starting point and up to 100 previously set destinations are displayed on the screen. “Delete”: Select to delete the previous destination. (To delete previous destinations, see page 88.)  When the desired destination is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.)  The list of previous destinations can also be deleted by selecting “Delete Previous Dest.” on the “Navigation Settings” screen when the vehicle is stopped. (See “DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS” on page 125.) 82 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address Book” DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Emergency” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 3 Select “Address Book” on the “Destina- 3 Select “Emergency” on the second 4 Select the screen button of the desired  The display changes to a screen to select 3 police stations, dealers, hospitals or fire stations. Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) screen. tion” screen. address book entry. Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) screen. page of the “Destination” screen.  A list of registered address book entries is displayed. “Options”: Select to register or edit address book entries. (See page 117.)  The selected emergency category is displayed.  When the desired address book entry is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) 83 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4 Select the desired emergency category. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH 5 Select the screen button of the desired destination. DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Intersection & Freeway” There are 2 methods to search a destination by Intersection & Freeway: (a) Search by intersection (b) Search by freeway  When the desired destination is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) INFORMATION ●The navigation system does not guide in areas where route guidance is unavailable. (See page 145.) ●The emergency function can be used even while driving. ●While driving, only the currently displayed items and the items on the next page can be viewed. 84 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the second page of the “Destination” screen. 4 Select the desired method. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCH BY “Intersection” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 7 Select the screen button of the desired item. Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 2 Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the second page of the “Destination” screen. 3 Select “Intersection” on the “Intersection & Freeway” screen. 4 Input the name of the first intersecting NAVIGATION SYSTEM street which is located near the destination to be set, and select “OK”.  When the desired item is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm 3 Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) INFORMATION 5 Select the screen button of the desired item. 6 Input the name of the second intersecting street. ●If the same 2 streets cross at more than 1 intersection, the screen changes and displays the menu to select the city name where the streets intersect. Select the city, and the map location of the selected destination and the route preference. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) 85 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCH BY “Freeway Entrance / Exit” 7 Input a freeway entrance or exit name, and select “OK”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Destination”. 2 Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the second page of the “Destination” screen. 3 Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit” on the “Intersection & Freeway” screen. 4 Input a freeway name. 5 Select the screen button of the desired freeway. 8 Select the screen button of the desired entrance or exit name.  When the desired entrance or exit is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) INFORMATION 6 Select “Entrance” or “Exit”. 86 RX450h/350_Navi_U ●Be sure to use the complete name of the freeway or highway, including the hyphen, when entering the destination. Freeways and interstates use an “I” (I-405). US highways use the state designation before the number (CA-118). 1. DESTINATION SEARCH DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Map” DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Coordinates” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” 3 Select “Map” on the second page of the 3 Select “Coordinates” on the second 4 Scroll the map to the desired point. 4 Input the latitude and the longitude. 5 Select “Go to ”. 5 After inputting the latitude and longi- Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) screen. “Destination” screen. INFORMATION ●Guidance starts if “OK” is selected even while driving. However, the cursor cannot be moved. screen. page of the “Destination” screen. 3 tude, select “OK”.  When the desired screen button is selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) 87 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM  The navigation system performs a search for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 1. DESTINATION SEARCH DELETING SET DESTINATIONS 5 Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s). A set destination can be deleted. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Del.Dest.” on the “Destination” screen.  When more than 1 destination is set, a list will be displayed on the screen. 4 Select the destination to be deleted.  A message appears to confirm the request to delete.  If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be recovered. If more than 1 destination has been set, the system will recalculate the route(s) to the set destination(s) as necessary.  If “No” is selected, the previous screen will be displayed.  Set destinations can also be deleted by selecting “Route”. (See “DELETING DESTINATIONS” on page 101.) “Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list. 88 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH 2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE When “Map” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the map screen will be displayed. The map location of the selected destination can be set as a destination. 1 Scroll the map to the desired point.  If a destination has already been set, “Go to ” and “Add to Route” will be displayed. “Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination. “Info”: If this screen button is displayed on the top of the screen, select it to view items such as name, address, position and phone number. 3 3 To start guidance, select “OK”. NAVIGATION SYSTEM “Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. No. Function Current position  When an arrow facing the desired point is selected, the map scrolls in that direction.  The scroll stops when the selection of the arrow is released. Destination point 2 Select “Go to ”. Distance of the entire route  The system starts route search and displays recommended routes. Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination. Type of route and its distance Select to change the route. (See page 91.) Select the desired route from 3 possible routes. (See page 90.) 89 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH  Guidance can be paused or resumed. (See “PAUSING AND RESUMING GUIDANCE” on page 106.)  If “OK” is selected until a beep sounds, demo mode will start. Press the “MAP/ VOICE” button on the Remote Touch to end demo mode. 3 ROUTES SELECTION 1 Select “3 Routes”. CAUTION ● Be sure to obey traffic regulations and keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been changed, the route guidance may not indicate such changed information. 2 Select “Preferred”, “Alternate” or “Short”. INFORMATION ●The route for returning may not be the same as that for going. ●The route guidance to the destination may not be the shortest route nor a route without traffic congestion. ●Route guidance may not be available if there is no road data for the specified location. ●When setting the destination on a map with a scale larger than 0.5 miles (800 m), the map scale changes to 0.5 miles (800 m) automatically. If this occurs, set the destination again. ●If a destination that is not located on a road is set, the vehicle will be guided to the point on a road nearest to the destination. The road nearest to the point selected is set as the destination. 90 RX450h/350_Navi_U No. Function Select to display the recommended route. Select to display the alternative route. Select to display the route that is the shortest distance to the set destination. Select to display the information shown below about each of the 3 routes. 1. DESTINATION SEARCH EDIT ROUTE Conditions for the route to the destination can be set again. 1 Select “Edit Route”. No. Function Time necessary for the entire trip 3 Distance of the entire trip 2 This screen is displayed. NAVIGATION SYSTEM Toll road Freeway Ferry No. Function Page Select to add destinations. 100 Select to delete destinations. 101 Select to reorder destinations. 100 Select to display the choices available when setting the conditions the system uses to determine the route to the destination. 104 91 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. DESTINATION SEARCH INFORMATION ●Even if the “Freeways” indicator is dimmed, the route cannot avoid including a freeway in some cases. (See page 104.) ●If the calculated route includes a trip by ferry, the route guidance shows a sea route. After you travel by ferry, the current position may be incorrect. Upon reception of GPS signals, it is automatically corrected. 92 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN During route guidance, various types of guidance screens can be displayed depending on conditions. SCREEN LAYOUT DURING FREEWAY DRIVING During freeway driving, the freeway exit information screen will be displayed. This screen displays the distance to the next junction/exit, or POIs in the vicinity of the freeway exit. 3 Function Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direction Guidance route Current position No./ Icon Function Distance from the current position to the exit or junction Exit number and junction name Distance and travel/arrival time to the destination Current position Current street name POIs that are close to a freeway exit INFORMATION ●If the vehicle goes off the guidance route, the route is searched again. ●For some areas, the roads have not been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select a road that should not be traveled on. ●When arriving at the set destination the destination name will be displayed on the top of the screen. Selecting “Off” clears the display. ●When the head-up display is on, turn-byturn guidance arrows will be displayed on the windshield. Current street name Select to display the selected map of the exit vicinity. Select to scroll to farther junctions or exits. Select to scroll to closer junctions or exits. Select to display the closest 3 junctions or exits. 93 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM No. 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE WHEN APPROACHING A FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION When the vehicle approaches an exit or junction, the freeway guidance screen will be displayed. WHEN APPROACHING AN INTERSECTION When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance screen will be displayed. No. No. Function Next street name Current position Distance from the current position to the exit or junction : Select to hide the freeway guidance screen.  Select “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/ VOICE” button on the Remote Touch, to change back to the freeway guidance screen. 94 RX450h/350_Navi_U Function Next street name Current position Distance to the intersection : Select to hide the intersection guidance screen.  Select “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/ VOICE” button on the Remote Touch, to change back to the intersection guidance screen. 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE OTHER SCREENS ■ TURN LIST SCREEN On this screen, the list of turns on the guidance route can be viewed. 1 Select “Turn List” during guidance to ■ ARROW SCREEN On this screen, information about the next turn on the guidance route can be viewed. 1 Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” during guidance to display the arrow screen. display the turn list. 3 No. Function Turn direction Distance between turns Next street or destination name NAVIGATION SYSTEM No. Function Exit number or street name Turn direction Distance to the next turn Current street name Current street name 95 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where maneuvering the vehicle is necessary, the system’s voice guidance will provide various messages. 4 miles 0.5 miles 5 miles 0.5 miles No. Voice guidance “Proceed about 4 miles to the traffic circle.” No. Voice guidance “Proceed about 5 miles to Main street.” “In half of a mile, traffic circle ahead and then the 3rd exit onto Main street.” “The 3rd exit ahead.” “In half of a mile, right turn onto Main street.” “The exit ahead.” “Next right.”/“Right turn ahead.” (Beep sound only) (Beep sound only) INFORMATION ●The street names may not be pronounced correctly or clearly due to the text-to-speech function. ●On freeways, interstates or other highways with higher speed limits, the voice guidance will be made at earlier points than on city streets in order to allow time to maneuver the vehicle. 96 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE No. Voice guidance “In half of a mile, make a legal Uturn.” “Make a legal U-turn ahead.”  The system announces the approach to the final destination. No. “In half of a mile, your destination is ahead.” “Your destination is ahead.” “You have arrived at your destination. The route guidance is now finished.” (Beep sound only)  If a voice guidance command cannot be heard, press the “MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote Touch to hear it again.  To adjust the voice guidance volume, see “VOICE VOLUME” on page 67. INFORMATION ●If the system cannot determine the current position correctly (in cases of poor GPS signal reception), the voice guidance may be early or late. 97 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 Voice guidance NAVIGATION SYSTEM *: The system indicates a U-turn if the distance between 2 one-way roads (of opposite directions) is less than 50 ft. (15 m) in residential areas or 164 ft. (50 m) in nonresidential areas. 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ■ ROUTES INCLUDING IPD ROADS Even when on IPD roads (roads that are not completely digitized in our database), you will be guided along the searched route via voice guidance.  After it has made a route calculation, the system will advise the user whether IPD roads are included in the route or not.  The portion of the route that covers IPD roads is indicated by light blue. No. Voice guidance “On the way to your destination, there will be roads with incomplete data.” “In half of a mile, left turn.” “Next left. Upcoming roads have incomplete data. Please carefully observe the local traffic restrictions, as they may not match the navigation guidance.”  IPD roads are roads that are not yet completely digitized in our database. However, their geometry, name and administrative coding are already known. 98 RX450h/350_Navi_U CAUTION ● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations and keep the road condition in mind especially when you are driving on IPD roads. The route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way street. 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION When the vehicle is on the guidance route, the distance and the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination are displayed. When the vehicle is not on the guidance route, the distance and direction of the destination are displayed. When driving on the guidance route with more than 1 destination set, the distance and estimated travel/arrival time from the current position to each destination are displayed. 1 Select the screen button indicated by the arrow. Icon Function Estimated travel time is displayed. Estimated arrival time is displayed. Select to switch to estimated arrival time. 3 Displayed while driving off the guidance route. The destination direction is indicated by an arrow. INFORMATION 2 Select the number screen button to display the desired destination. ●When the vehicle is on the guidance route, the distance measured along the route is displayed. Travel time and arrival time are calculated based on the set vehicle speed information. (See “DRIVING SPEEDS” on page 129.) However, when the vehicle is not on the guidance route, the distance is the linear distance between the current position and the destination.  The distance, estimated travel time and estimated arrival time from the current position to the selected destination are displayed. 99 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM Select to switch to estimated travel time. 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS ADDING DESTINATIONS Destinations can be added and routes can be searched again. 1 Select “Route”. REORDERING DESTINATIONS When more than 1 destination is set, the arrival order of the destinations can be changed. 1 Select “Route”. 2 Select “Add”. 2 Select “Reorder”. 3 Input an additional destination in the same way as a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) 4 Select the desired “Add Destination 3 Select the desired destination and se- lect “Move Up” or “Move Down” to change the arrival order. Here” to insert the new destination into the route. 4 After selecting the destinations, select “OK”.  The system searches for the guidance route again, and displays the entire route. 100 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE DELETING DESTINATIONS A set destination can be deleted. 1 Select “Route”. 4 Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s).  If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be recovered. If more than 1 destination has been set, the system will recalculate the route(s) to the set destination(s) as necessary.  If “No” is selected, the previous screen will be displayed. 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Delete”.  When more than 1 destination is set, a list will be displayed on the screen. 3 Select the destination to be deleted. “Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list.  A message appears to confirm the request to delete. 101 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 5. SETTING ROUTE DETOUR SETTING While the route guidance is operating, the route can be changed to detour around a section of the route where a delay is caused by road repairs, or an accident, etc. 1 Select “Route”. “1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles (km)”: Select one of these screen buttons to start the detour process. After detouring, the system returns to the original guidance route. “Whole Route”: Select to make the system calculate an entire new route to the destination. “Around Traffic”: Select to make the system search for the route based on the traffic congestion information received from XM NavTraffic®. For details, see “XM NavTraffic®” on page 365. INFORMATION 2 Select “Detour”. 3 Select a screen button to select the desired detour distance. ●This picture shows an example of how the system would guide around a delay caused by a traffic jam. This position indicates the location of a traffic jam caused by road repairs, an accident, etc. This route indicates the detour suggested by the system. ●When the vehicle is on a freeway, the detour distance selections are 5, 15 and 25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are in km). ●The system may not be able to calculate a detour route depending on the selected distance and surrounding road conditions. 102 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ROUTE OVERVIEW TURN LIST 1 Select 1 Select “Route”. or to skip to the next page of the list of roads. Select and hold or to scroll through the list of roads. 2 Select “Overview”. 3 3 The entire route from the current position to the destination is displayed. INFORMATION No. Function Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination. ●However, not all road names in the route may appear on the list. If a road changes its name without requiring a turn (such as on a street that runs through 2 or more cities), the name change will not appear on the list. The street names will be displayed in order from the starting point, along with the distance to the next turn. Select to start guidance. 103 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM : This mark indicates the direction in which you should turn at the intersection. “Map”: The selected point is displayed on the map screen. 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ROUTE PREFERENCE 4 The entire route from the starting point to the destination is displayed. TO SELECT ROUTE TYPE The Preferred, Short or Alternative route can be selected. 1 Select “Route”. “OK”: Select to start guidance. “Edit Route”: Select to change a route. (See page 91.) TO SELECT ROUTE FEATURES 2 Select “Preferences”. A number of choices are available when setting the conditions the system uses to determine the route to the destination. 1 Select “Route”. 3 Select “Preferred”, “Short” or “Alternate” and select “OK”. 104 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 2 Select “Preferences” to display condi- tions that can be selected when the system determines the route to the destination. STARTING ROUTE FROM ADJACENT ROAD The route guidance can be started from an adjacent road. (e.g. When route guidance is set on the freeway, but the vehicle is driven parallel along the freeway.) 1 Select “Route”. 3 3 Select the desired route preferences. NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Preferences”.  The system will avoid using routes that include items whose indicators are off. 4 After selecting the desired route preference, select “OK”. 3 Select “Start from Adjacent Road”. INFORMATION ●When there is no adjacent road, this screen button will not be displayed. 105 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE PAUSING AND RESUMING GUIDANCE TO RESUME GUIDANCE 1 Select “Route”. TO PAUSE GUIDANCE 1 Select “Route”. 2 Select “Resume Guidance”. 2 Select “Pause Guidance”.  The map screen, with the current position displayed, will be returned to.  The screen will return to the current position map without route guidance. INFORMATION ●Without route guidance, “Pause Guidance” cannot be used. 106 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE SHOW ON MAP DISPLAY POI ICONS POI icons such as gas stations and restaurants can be displayed on the map screen. Their location can also be set as a destination and used for route guidance. 1 Select “Show on Map”. ular type of POI icon on the screen.  When the POI icons to be displayed on the map screen have already been set, “Change POI” is displayed. be displayed. (To change the displayed POI list, see page 132.) SELECTING POI ICONS TO BE DISPLAYED Up to 5 categories of icons can be displayed on the map screen. 1 Select the desired POI category to dis- play POI location icons on the map 3 screen.  By selecting the desired POI category and then selecting “OK”, the selected POI icons are displayed on the map screen.  To turn off the POI icons on the map screen, select “Clear”. “Other POIs”: Select to display other POIs categories if the desired POIs cannot be found on the limited choice screen. “Find Local POI”: Select to search for the nearest POIs. Then select one of the categories. The system will list the points within 20 miles (32 km). (See page 108.) 2 Select “Other POIs” on the “Select POI Icons” screen.  When a POI category is selected from either the limited list or the complete list, the icons of those locations will be displayed on the map screen. 107 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Select POI” to display a partic-  A screen with a limited choice of POIs will 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 3 Select the desired POI categories. TO DISPLAY THE LOCAL POI LIST Points of Interest that are within 20 miles (32 km) of the current position will be listed from among the selected categories. 1 Select “Find Local POI”.  The selected category’s icon will appear on the top left of the screen.  By selecting the desired POI category and then selecting “OK”, the selected POI icons are displayed on the map screen.  If the desired POI category is not on the screen, select “List All Categories” to list all POI categories. 2 Select the screen button of the desired POI.  Select the desired POI categories from the list. • The selected category icon appears on the top left of the screen. • By selecting the desired POI category and then selecting “OK”, the selected POI icons are displayed on the map screen. • To return to the POI category selection screen, select “More”. 108 RX450h/350_Navi_U  The selected POIs are displayed on the map screen. “Near...”: Select to search for POIs near the current position or along the route. 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE 2 When the desired POI overlaps with the cursor, select “Enter ”.  The screen changes and displays the map location of the selected destination and route preference. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89.) TO HIDE POI ICONS No. Function 1 Select “Show on Map”. Select to display the list of POIs near the current position. 3 Select to display the list of POIs along the route. NAVIGATION SYSTEM TO SET A POI AS A DESTINATION One of the Point of Interest icons can be selected on the map screen as a destination and can be used for route guidance. 2 Select “POI Icons”. 1 Directly select the desired POI icon to set it as a destination.  The “POI Icons” indicator is dimmed.  The map screen will be displayed with the POI icons hidden.  To display the POI icons again, select “POI Icons” on the “Show on Map” screen.  The map will shift so that the icon is centered on the screen and overlaps with the cursor . At this time, the distance from the current position is displayed on the screen. The distance shown is measured as a straight line from the current position to the POI. 109 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ROUTE TRACE Up to 124 miles (200 km) of the traveled route can be stored and retraced on the display. TO STOP RECORDING THE ROUTE TRACE 1 Select “Show on Map”. INFORMATION ●This feature is available when the map scale is 30 miles (50 km) or less. TO START RECORDING THE ROUTE TRACE 2 Select “Route Trace”. 1 Select “Show on Map”. 2 Select “Route Trace”.  The “Route Trace” indicator is highlighted. 110 RX450h/350_Navi_U  Selecting “Yes” stops recording and the route trace remains displayed on the screen.  Selecting “No” stops recording and the route trace is erased. 3. ADDRESS BOOK 1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS Points or areas on the map can be registered. The registered points can be used on the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME” on page 71, and “DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address Book”” on page 83.) Registered areas to avoid, will be avoided when the system searches for a route. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 3 Select “Navigation”. 4 Select the desired items to be set. Remote Touch. 3 can be performed: No. 2 Select “Setup”. Function Page Select to set home. 112 Select to set preset destinations. 114 Select to set the address book. 116 Select to set areas to avoid. 121 Select to delete previous destinations. 125 Select to set detailed navigation settings. 127 111 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM  On this screen, the following operations 3. ADDRESS BOOK REGISTERING HOME SETTING UP THE “Home” If home has been registered, that information can be recalled by selecting “Go Home” on the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME” on page 71.) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Home” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “Set Home”. 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Home”. 5 Select the desired screen button and enter the location in the same way as for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) 5 Select the desired screen button.  When registration of home is completed, the “Edit Home” screen will be displayed. 6 Select “OK”. No. Function Page Registering home 112 Editing home 113 Deleting home 113 112 RX450h/350_Navi_U  To edit registered information, see “EDITING HOME” on page 113. 3. ADDRESS BOOK EDITING HOME 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Home” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. “Show Name on Map”: The name of a home can be set to be displayed on the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See page 119.) 6 Select “OK”. DELETING HOME 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 4 Select “Edit”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Home” on the “Navigation Set- 3 tings” screen. NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4 Select “Delete”. 5 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited. 5 Select “Yes” to delete home and select “No” to cancel the deletion. No. Function Page Select to edit the home name. The name can be displayed on the map. 119 Select to edit location information. 119 Select to edit the phone number. 120 Select to change the icon to be displayed on the map. 118 113 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. ADDRESS BOOK REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS SETTING UP THE “Preset Destinations” If preset destination has been registered, that information can be recalled by using “Preset Destinations” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 71.) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Preset Destinations” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “Set”. 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Preset Destinations”. 5 Select the desired screen button and enter the location in the same way as for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) 5 Select the desired screen button. No. Function Page Registering a preset destination 114 Editing a preset destination 115 Deleting a preset destination 116 114 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. ADDRESS BOOK 6 Select a position for this preset destina- 5 Select the screen button of the desired  When registration of a preset destination is 6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edit- tion. completed, the “Edit Preset Destination” screen will be displayed. preset destination. ed. 3 7 Select “OK”. “EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 115. EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS Function Page 119 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” Select to edit the preset destination name. The name can be displayed on the map. 3 Select “Preset Destinations” on the Select to edit location information. 119 4 Select “Edit”. Select to edit the phone number. 120 Select to change the icon to be displayed on the map. 118 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. screen. “Navigation Settings” screen. No. “Show Name on Map”: The name of a preset destination can be set to be displayed on the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See page 119.) 7 Select “OK”. 115 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM  To edit registered information, see 3. ADDRESS BOOK DELETING PRESET DESTINATIONS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Preset Destinations” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “Delete”. SETTING UP THE “Address Book” Points or areas on the map can be registered. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Address Book”. 5 Select the preset destination to be deleted. 5 Select the desired screen button. Screen button Function “Select All” Select all preset destinations. “Unselect All” Select to cancel the “Select All” function. 6 Select “Delete”. 7 Select “Yes” to delete the preset destination and select “No” to cancel the deletion. 116 RX450h/350_Navi_U No. Function Page Registering address book entries 117 Editing address book entries 117 Deleting address book entries 120 3. ADDRESS BOOK REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES 1 Press the “MENU” button on the INFORMATION ● Up to 100 address book entries can be registered. Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “New”. EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES The icon, name, location and/or phone number of a registered address book entry can be edited. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 3 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” NAVIGATION SYSTEM Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. screen. 3 Select “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 5 Select the desired screen button and 4 Select “Edit”. enter the location in the same way as for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) 5 Select the screen button of the desired address book entry.  After the address book entry has been reg- istered, the “Edit Address Book Entry” screen will be displayed. 6 Select “OK”.  To edit registered information, see “EDITING ADDRESS ENTRIES” on page 117. BOOK 117 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. ADDRESS BOOK 6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited. ■ TO CHANGE “Icon” 1 Select “Edit”. No. Function Page Select to edit the address book entry name. The name can be displayed on the map. 119 Select to edit location information. 119 Select to edit the phone number. 120 Select to change the icon to be displayed on the map. 118  Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”, “Page 2” or “With Sound” tab. “Show Name on Map”: The name of an address book entry can be set to be displayed on the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See page 119.) 7 Select “OK”. 2 Select the desired icon. ■ SOUND ICONS A sound for some address book entries can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the address book entry, the selected sound will be heard. 1 Select the “With Sound” tab on the “Address Book Entry Icon” screen. 2 Select the desired sound icon.  The next screen appears when “Bell (with Direction)” is selected. 118 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. ADDRESS BOOK 3 Select either or to adjust the direction. Then select “OK”. ■ DISPLAYING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY NAMES 1 Select “On” to display the name on the map and select “Off” to not display it. INFORMATION ● The bell sounds only when the vehicle 3 ■ TO CHANGE “Location” 1 Select “Edit”. NAVIGATION SYSTEM approaches this point in the direction that has been set. ■ TO CHANGE “Name” 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select one of the 8 directional screen buttons to move the cursor sired point on the map. to the de- 2 Enter the name using the alphanumeric keys. 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed.  Up to 70 characters can be entered. 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed. 119 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. ADDRESS BOOK ■ TO CHANGE “Phone #” (PHONE NUMBER) 4 Select “Delete”. 1 Select “Edit”. 5 Select the address to be deleted. 2 Enter the number using the number keys. 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed. DELETING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 120 RX450h/350_Navi_U Screen button Function “Select All” Select all registered addresses. “Unselect All” Select to cancel the “Select All” function. 6 Select “Delete”. 7 Select “Yes” to delete the address book entries and select “No” to cancel the deletion. 3. ADDRESS BOOK REGISTERING AREAS TO AVOID SETTING UP THE “Areas to Avoid” Areas to be avoided because of traffic jams, construction work or other reasons can be registered as areas to avoid. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “New”. 3 4 Select “Areas to Avoid”. 5 Select the desired screen button and enter the location in the same way as for a destination search, or display the map of the area to be avoided. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.) 5 Select the desired screen button. No. Function Page Registering areas to avoid 121 Editing areas to avoid 122 Deleting areas to avoid 125 121 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM screen. 3. ADDRESS BOOK 6 Scroll the map to the desired point. EDITING AREA TO AVOID The name, location and/or area size of a registered area can be edited. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. “Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. 3 Select “Areas to Avoid” on the “Naviga- 7 Select “Enter”. 8 Select either or 4 Select “Edit”. to change the size of the area to be avoided. tion Settings” screen. 5 Select the area to be avoided. 9 Select “OK”.  When registration of an area to avoid is completed, the “Area to Avoid” screen will be displayed. INFORMATION ● If a destination is input in the area to avoid or the route calculation cannot be made without running through the area to avoid, a route passing through the area to be avoided may be shown. ● Up to 10 locations can be registered as points/areas to avoid. 122 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. ADDRESS BOOK 6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited. ■ TO CHANGE “Name” 1 Select “Edit”. No. Function Page keys. 123 Select to edit area location. 124 Select to edit area size. 124 “Show Name on Map”: The name of an area to be avoided can be set to be displayed on the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See page 123.) “Active”: The area to avoid feature can be set to “On” or “Off”.  Up to 70 characters can be entered. 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed. ■ DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS TO BE AVOIDED 1 Select “On”, next to “Show Name on Map”, to display the name of an area to be avoided on the map. Select “Off” not to display it. 123 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Select to edit the name of the area to avoid. The name can be displayed on the map. 7 Select “OK”. 2 Enter the name using the alphanumeric 3. ADDRESS BOOK ■ TO CHANGE “Location” ■ TO CHANGE “Size” 1 Select “Edit”. 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select one of the 8 directional screen buttons to move the cursor sired point on the map. to the de- 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed. 124 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 Select either or to change the size of the area to be avoided. 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed. 3. ADDRESS BOOK DELETING AREAS TO AVOID 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS Previous destinations can be deleted. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” 4 Select “Delete”. screen. 3 4 Select “Delete Previous Dest.”. 5 Select the previous destination to be deleted. Screen button Function “Select All” Select all registered areas to avoid. “Unselect All” Select to cancel the “Select All” function. 6 Select “Delete”. 7 Select “Yes” to delete the area(s) and select “No” to cancel the deletion. 125 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 5 Select the area to be deleted. 3. ADDRESS BOOK Screen button Function “Select All” Select all previous destinations. “Unselect All” Select to cancel the “Select All” function. 6 Select “Delete”. 7 Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s) and select “No” to cancel the deletion. 126 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP 1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS Settings are available for driving speeds, favorite POI categories, automatic screen change, “ Off” function, etc. 4 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 Select the items to be set. 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Setup”. 6 Select “Save”. 3 Select “Navigation”. 127 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS No. Function Select to set the average driving speed. (See “DRIVING SPEEDS” on page 129.) Select to set the automatic input function to “On” or “Off”. Select to set the voice guidance for the next street name to “On” or “Off” during route guidance. Select to set the automatic reroute of the guidance route to avoid heavy congestion to “On” or “Off”. (See “AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC” on page 130.)  On this screen, the following functions can be performed: Select to set the indication of freely flowing traffic by the arrow to “On” or “Off”. (See “SHOW FREE FLOWING TRAFFIC” on page 131.) Select to set displayed POI icon categories. (See “POI CATEGORY CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)” on page 132.) Select to set screen buttons to be displayed on the map screen when “ Off” is selected. (See “SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION (“ Off” Function)” on page 133.) 128 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP No. Function Select to adjust the current position mark manually. Miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement can also be adjusted. (See “CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION” on page 134.) Select to set the display of pop-up information to “On” or “Off”. (See “POP-UP INFORMATION” on page 135.) The speed that is used for the calculation of the estimated travel time and estimated arrival time can be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “Driving Speeds”.  To reset all setup items, select “Default”. 5 Select “ ” or “ ” to set the average vehicle speeds for “Residential”, “Main Streets” and “Freeways”.  To set the default speeds, select “Default”.  To use settings based on traffic information, select “Consider Traffic Info.”. 6 After setting of the desired speeds is completed, select “Save”. 129 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Select to set IPD road guidance to “On” or “Off”. (For information on IPD roads, see page 98.) DRIVING SPEEDS 4. SETUP INFORMATION ●The displayed time to the destination is the approximate driving time that is calculated based on the selected speeds and the actual position along the guidance route. ●The time shown on the screen may vary greatly depending on progress along the route, which may be affected by conditions such as traffic jams and construction work. ●Up to 99 hours 59 minutes can be displayed. AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC The guidance route automatically changes to another route to avoid heavy congestion when “Avoid Traffic” is turned on. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “Avoid Traffic”. 130 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP 5 Select “On” or “Off”. 6 Select “Save”.  When congestion information about the guidance route has been received, a screen will appear to ask if it is desirable to reroute to avoid the congestion.  Select “Yes” to reroute. Another route to avoid the congestion will appear.  Select “No” if it is not desirable to reroute. INFORMATION Free flowing traffic can be shown by an arrow when “Show Free Flowing Traffic” is turned on. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the 3 4 Select “Show Free Flowing Traffic”. NAVIGATION SYSTEM ●When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. (See page 366.) SHOW FREE FLOWING TRAFFIC “Navigation Settings” screen. 5 Select “On” or “Off”. 6 Select “Save”. INFORMATION ●When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. 131 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP POI CATEGORY CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS) 6 Select the desired group. Select up to 6 POI icons to be displayed on the map screen. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “Favorite POI Categories”. 5 Select the category to be changed. 132 RX450h/350_Navi_U  If the desired POI category is not on the screen, select “List All Categories” to list all POI categories. 7 Select the desired category.  The screen returns to the “Favorite POI Categories” screen. 8 Select “OK”. 4. SETUP SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION (“ Off” Function) 5 Select the screen buttons to be turned off. The selected screen buttons will be dimmed. Each screen button and current street name on the map screen can be displayed or hidden. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 6 Select “OK”. NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4 Select ““ Off” Function”.  To set the setting as a default, select 3 “Default”.  The previous screen will be displayed. 7 Select “Save”. 133 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION The current position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement can also be adjusted. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. ■ POSITION/DIRECTION BRATION CALI- When driving, the current position mark will be automatically corrected by GPS signals. If GPS reception is poor due to location, the current position mark can be adjusted manually. 1 Select “Position / Direction”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the “Navigation Settings” screen. 4 Select “Calibration”. 2 Select one of the 8 directional screen buttons to move the cursor sired point on the map. 5 Select the desired screen button. 3 Select “OK”.  For additional information on the accuracy of a current position, see “LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM” on page 144. 134 RX450h/350_Navi_U to the de- 4. SETUP 4 Select either or to adjust the direction of the current position mark. POP-UP INFORMATION When “Pop-up Information” is turned on, pop-up information will be displayed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. 5 Select “OK”.  The map will be displayed. “Navigation Settings” screen. 3 4 Select “Pop-up Information”. NAVIGATION SYSTEM ■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION 3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the The tire change calibration function will be used when replacing the tires. This function will adjust miscalculation caused by the circumference difference between the old and new tires. 1 To perform the distance calibration procedure, select “Tire Change”. 5 Select “On” or “Off”. 6 Select “Save”.  When “Pop-up Information” is turned off, the following messages will not be displayed.  The message appears and the quick distance calibration is automatically started. A few seconds later, a map will be displayed. INFORMATION ●If this procedure is not performed when the tires are replaced, the current position mark may be incorrectly displayed. 135 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP This message appears when the map scale is over 0.5 miles (800 m). This message appears when the map is switched to dual map screen mode. 136 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP 2. VEHICLE SETTINGS MAINTENANCE 4 Select “Maintenance”. When the navigation system is turned on, the “Maintenance Reminder” screen displays when it is time to replace a part or certain components. (See page 33.) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 Select the desired screen button. 3  Setting maintenance information. (See page 138.)  Setting dealer. (See page 140.) 3 Select “Vehicle”. 137 RX450h/350_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Setup”. 4. SETUP MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SETTING 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen. 4 Select the desired screen button.  When the vehicle needs to be serviced, the screen button color will change to orange. 138 RX450h/350_Navi_U Screen button “Engine oil” Function Replace engine oil “Oil filter” Replace engine oil filter “Rotation” Rotate tires “Tires” Replace tires “Battery” “Brake pad” Replace 12-volt battery Replace brake pads “Wipers” Replace wiper blades “Coolant” Replace coolant “Brake oil” Replace brake fluid “Trans. fluid” Replace transmission fluid “Service” Scheduled maintenance “Air filter” Replace air filter “Personal” New information items can be created separately from provided ones. “Delete All” Select to cancel all conditions which have been input. “Reset All” Select to reset the item which has satisfied a condition. 4. SETUP Function “Set Dealer” Select to register dealer information. (See “DEALER SETTING” on page 140.) “Dealer Info.” Select to edit dealer information. (See “DEALER SETTING” on page 140.) “Reminder” When this screen button is selected, the indicator is illuminated. The system is set to give maintenance information with the “Maintenance Reminder” screen. (See page 33.) 5 Input the conditions. No. Function Select to input the next maintenance date. Select to input the driving distance until the next maintenance check. Select to cancel the date and distance conditions. Select to reset the date and distance conditions. 6 Select “OK”.  The screen then returns to the “Maintenance” screen. INFORMATION ●For scheduled maintenance information, refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/ Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. ●Depending on driving or road conditions, the actual date and distance maintenance should be performed may differ from the stored date and distance in the system. 139 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Screen button 4. SETUP DEALER SETTING 6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited. Dealer information can be registered in the system. With dealer information registered, route guidance to the dealer is available. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen. 4 Select “Set Dealer”. 5 If a dealer has not been registered, enter the location of a dealer in the same way as for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 70.)  When “Set Dealer” registration is finished, the “Dealer” screen is displayed. 140 RX450h/350_Navi_U No. Function Page Select to enter the name of a dealer. 141 Select to enter the name of a dealer member. 141 Select to set the location. 141 Select to enter the phone number. 142 Select to delete the dealer information displayed on the screen.  Select to set the displayed dealer as a destination. 89 4. SETUP ■ TO EDIT “Dealer” OR “Contact” ■ TO EDIT “Location” 1 Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Con- 1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”. tact”. 2 Enter the name using the alphanumeric keys. 3 Select “OK”. buttons to move the cursor to the de- 3 sired point on the map screen. NAVIGATION SYSTEM  Up to 70 characters can be entered for dealer and 24 characters for contact. 2 Select one of the 8 directional screen 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed.  The previous screen will be displayed. 141 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP ■ TO EDIT “Phone #” (PHONE NUMBER) VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION 1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”. Vehicle settings can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Enter the number using number keys. 3 Select “OK”.  The previous screen will be displayed. 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Vehicle Customization”. 5 Select the desired items to be set.  For a list of the settings that can be changed, refer to “Owner’s Manual”. 6 After changing the settings, select “Save”. A message indicating that the settings are being saved will appear. Do not perform any other operations while this message is displayed. 142 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP CAUTION ● When performing the customization pro- cedure, ensure that there is sufficient ventilation in the vehicle and surrounding area. If there is insufficient ventilation, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) and inhaling them may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 3 INFORMATION NAVIGATION SYSTEM ●To avoid discharging the 12-volt battery, perform the customization procedure with the hybrid system operating . 143 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) 1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM This navigation system calculates the current position using satellite signals, various vehicle signals, map data, etc. However, an accurate position may not be shown depending on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides an accurate current position, normally using 4 or more satellites, and in some case 3 satellites. The GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation system will compensate for this most of the time, occasional positioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m) can and should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected within a few seconds. When the vehicle is receiving signals from satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the top left of the screen. The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on the map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings, trucks, or even the placement of objects on the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS signals. The GPS satellites may not send signals due to repairs or improvements being made to them. Even when the navigation system is receiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle position may not be shown accurately or inappropriate route guidance may occur in some cases. NOTICE ● The installation of window tinting may obstruct the GPS signals. Most window tinting contains some metallic content that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with navigation systems. 144 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)  Accurate current position may not be  If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals, the current position can be adjusted manually. For information on setting the current position calibration, see page 134.  Inappropriate route guidance may occur in the following cases: • When turning at an intersection off the designated route guidance. • If you set more than 1 destination but skip any of them, auto reroute will display a route returning to the destination on the previous route. • When turning at an intersection for which there is no route guidance. • When passing through an intersection for which there is no route guidance. • During auto reroute, the route guidance may not be available for the next turn to 3 the right or left. • During high speed driving, it may take a long time for auto reroute to operate. In auto reroute, a detour route may be shown. • After auto reroute, the route may not be changed. • If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or announced. • If a location has multiple names and the system announces 1 or more of them. • When a route cannot be searched. • If the route to your destination includes gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the route guidance may not be shown. • Your destination point might be shown on the opposite side of the street. • When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle that vary by time or season or other reasons. • The road and map data stored in the navigation system may not be complete or may not be the latest version. NAVIGATION SYSTEM shown in the following cases: • When driving on a small angled Y-shaped road. • When driving on a winding road. • When driving on a slippery road such as in sand, gravel, snow, etc. • When driving on a long straight road. • When freeway and surface streets run in parallel. • After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier. • When a long route is searched during high speed driving. • When driving without setting the current position calibration correctly. • After repeating a change of direction by going forward and backward, or turning on a turntable in a parking lot. • When leaving a covered parking lot or parking garage. • When a roof carrier is installed. • When driving with tire chains installed. • When the tires are worn. • After replacing a tire or tires. • When using tires that are smaller or larger than the factory specifications. • When the tire pressure in any of the 4 tires is not correct.  After replacing a tire, implement the operation described in “TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION”. (See page 135.) 145 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) INFORMATION ● This navigation system uses tire turning data and is designed to work with factoryspecified tires for the vehicle. Installing tires that are larger or smaller than the originally equipped diameter may cause inaccurate display of the current position. The tire pressure also affects the diameter of the tires, so make sure that the tire pressure of all 4 tires is correct. 146 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 PHONE 1 1 PHONE OPERATION 1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 148 2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE) .......................... 150 USING THE PHONE SWITCH......................... 151 USING THE STEERING SWITCHES............ 152 5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE............................. 168 6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE............................. 169 WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9” .............................. 169 INCOMING CALL WAITING........................... 171 7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION............................................. 172 ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN THIS SYSTEM .................................................. 153 CHECKING MESSAGES................................... 172 WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE ............................................... 153 NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION................ 174 3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE..... 156 CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 158 4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ............................... 161 PHONEBOOK......................................................... 177 BY DIAL......................................................................... 161 PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS.......................... 194 BY CALL HISTORY ............................................... 163 BY VOICE RECOGNITION............................. 165 CALLING USING AN SMS/ MMS MESSAGE .................................................. 167 4 5 2 SETUP 1. PHONE SETTINGS................................. 175 BY SPEED DIAL ....................................................... 163 3 REPLYING (QUICK REPLY) ............................ 173 RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth® PHONE............................................ 160 BY PHONEBOOK .................................................. 161 2 6 PHONE SOUND SETTINGS............................ 175 MESSAGE SETTINGS .......................................... 190 7 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ........................... 197 8 REGISTERED DEVICES ...................................... 197 SELECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE............ 202 SELECTING PORTABLE PLAYER.............. 203 9 ® DETAILED Bluetooth SETTINGS ............... 205 BY POI* CALL .......................................................... 167 10 *: Point of Interest 147 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 1. QUICK REFERENCE Bluetooth® phones can be operated via the navigation system’s screen. To display the hands-free operation screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and then select “Phone”, or the switch on the steering wheel. 148 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION No. Name The condition of Bluetooth® connection Function No connection Good An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built in the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used in the following conditions and/or places:  The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when it is behind the seat or in the glove box and console box).  The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials. Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the Bluetooth® connection is good. When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is displayed. 4 The receiving area The level of reception Empty Full This is not displayed when the Bluetooth® is not connected. The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount displayed on the cellular phone. The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have. This system does not have a charging function. “Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have. Poor Excellent The level of reception does not always correspond with the level displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be displayed depending on the phone you have. When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed. 149 RX450h/350_Navi_U PHONE The amount of battery charge left 1. PHONE OPERATION 2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE) The hands-free system enables calls to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering wheel. Bluetooth®. This system supports Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that enables cellular phones to be used without being connected by a cable or placed in a cradle. The operating procedure of the phone is explained here.  For registering and setting of the phone, see “PHONE SETTINGS” on page 175 and “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 197. CAUTION ●While driving, do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone. ●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. ●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. NOTICE ● Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may rise to a level that could damage the phone. INFORMATION ●If your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth®, this system cannot function. ●In the following conditions, the system may not function: • The cellular phone is turned off. • The current position is outside the communication area. • The cellular phone is not connected. • The cellular phone has a low battery. ●When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free at the same time, the following problems may occur: • The Bluetooth® connection may be cut. • Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback. ●This system supports the following services: • Bluetooth® Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher) • Profiles HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or higher) OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher SPP (Serial Port Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher* *: This profile is necessary when using Apps. (See “APPS” on page 380.) 150 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION INFORMATION ●If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible. ●If the connected Bluetooth® phone version is older than recommended or incompatible, this function may not be used. ●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this system. USING THE PHONE SWITCH By pressing the phone switch, a call can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel. 4 151 RX450h/350_Navi_U PHONE Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.  The microphone can be used when talking on the phone. 1. PHONE OPERATION INFORMATION ●The other party’s voice will be heard from the front speakers. The audio/video system will be muted during phone calls or when hands-free voice commands are used. ●Talk alternately with the other party on the phone. If both parties speak at the same time, the other party may not hear what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.) ●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may increase. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone. ●The other party may not hear you clearly when: • Driving on an unpaved road. (Making excessive traffic noise.) • Driving at high speeds. • The roof or windows are open. • The air conditioning vents are pointed towards the microphone. • The sound of the air-conditioning fan is loud. • There is a negative effect on sound quality due to the phone and/or network being used. 152 RX450h/350_Navi_U USING THE STEERING SWITCHES Volume control switch  Press the “+” side to increase the volume.  Press the “-” side to decrease the volume. 1. PHONE OPERATION ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN THIS SYSTEM WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE  The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connected, the following registered data cannot be read: • Phonebook data • Call history data • Speed dial data • Image data • All phone settings • Message settings A lot of personal data is registered when the hands-free system is used. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. (See “DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on page 63.) INFORMATION INFORMATION ●Once initialized, the data and settings will be erased. Pay much attention when initializing the data. 153 RX450h/350_Navi_U PHONE ●When a phone’s registration is deleted, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.  The following data in the system can be initialized: • Phonebook data • Call history data • Speed dial data • Image data 4 • All phone settings • Message settings 1. PHONE OPERATION U.S.A.  FCC ID : AJDK041  This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION ●FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ●This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). ●Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 154 RX450h/350_Navi_U Canada  IC : 775E-K041  This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. CAUTION ●NOTE Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. 1. PHONE OPERATION CAUTION ●This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). ●The Bluetooth* antenna cannot be removed (or replaced) by user. L’antenne Bluetooth* ne peut pas être supprimé (ou remplacé) par l’utilisateur. 4 PHONE *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 155 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a phone with the system. Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to make a hands-free call. If a Bluetooth® phone has not been registered yet, it is necessary to register it first according to the following procedure. A Bluetooth® phone cannot be registered while driving.  See “REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 198 of additional registration when registering. 2 Select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 3 Select “Yes” to register a phone. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.  If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered” on page 158. 156 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 4 When this screen is displayed, operate the Bluetooth® device. istration is complete.  When using the same phone, it is not necessary to register it again. When this screen is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. 4 PHONE  Search for the navigation system displayed on the system’s screen using your Bluetooth® device, and register the Bluetooth® device. For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it.  A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® phones. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® phone according to the confirmation message.  To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”. 5 This screen will be displayed when reg- When another Bluetooth® device is connected  If the Bluetooth® phone to be registered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this can be registered at the same time.  When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.  To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”. 157 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered 1 When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al- ready been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to delete 1 or more. 2 Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”. 3 Select “Yes”. If the Bluetooth® phone has a Bluetooth® audio function ®  When the Bluetooth phone to be registered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this audio function will be registered automatically at the same time and this screen may be displayed. If this screen is displayed, select “Yes” to connect the audio function or select “No” to cancel the connection. CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE AUTOMATICALLY When a phone is registered, auto connection is turned on. Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a location where connection can be established.  For automatic connection, see “CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”” on page 206.  When the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system searches for a nearby registered cellular phone. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 158 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION  The system will connect with the phone that was last connected, if it is nearby. When “Display Phone Status” is set to “On”, the connection status is displayed. (See “Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS” on page 207.)  This screen appears when the Bluetooth® phone is first connected after the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. INFORMATION MANUALLY When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is necessary to connect Bluetooth® manually. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Connect Phone”. ●It may take time if the phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth® device playback. ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. 4 PHONE 3 Select the screen button corresponding to the desired phone connection.  When the cellular phone’s device name has not been able to be obtained, “Device 1” to “Device 5” will be displayed in the order the phones were registered. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 159 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 4 This screen is displayed. 5 When the connection is completed, this screen is displayed. RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth® PHONE If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® network when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the Bluetooth® phone. When “Display Phone Status” is set to “On”, the connection status is displayed.  If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected on purpose, such as turning it off, this does not happen. Reconnect the Bluetooth® phone manually.  Now you can use the Bluetooth® phone. When a phone is connected while Bluetooth® audio is playing  This screen is displayed, and the Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily. 160 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE After a Bluetooth® phone has been registered, a call can be made using the hands-free system. There are 7 methods by which a call can be made. These are described below. BY PHONEBOOK A call can be made by inputting the phone number. This cannot be operated while driving. Calls can be made by using the phonebook data which is transferred from the registered cellular phone. The phonebook changes depending on the phone connected. Up to 1000 contacts (maximum of 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each phonebook. This cannot be operated while driving. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Select “Contacts”. BY DIAL Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 4 2 Select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen. PHONE  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 3 Select the desired key to input the phone number.  Each time deleted. 4 Select 2 Select the desired data from the list. is selected, an input digit is or press the the steering wheel. switch on  Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. 161 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 3 Select the desired number from the list. PBAP compatible models 4 Select PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible models or press the the steering wheel. switch on WHEN THE PHONEBOOK IS EMPTY 1 Select “Contacts”. 3 Transfer the phonebook data to the system using the Bluetooth® phone. 2 Select “Yes” or “Transfer” to automatically transfer the phonebook from the connected phone.  Select “Manual” to transfer the phonebook manually. (See “TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUMBER” on page 178.)  Select “No” or “Cancel” to cancel transferring.  If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot be transferred. 162 RX450h/350_Navi_U  This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.  Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring phonebook data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.  This screen appears while transferring. To cancel this function, select “Cancel”. 1. PHONE OPERATION 4 When the data transfer from a PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible model is complete, “Done” will appear on the screen. Select “Done”. 2 Select the desired number to call.  The list to be displayed can be changed by selecting the “Speed Dial 1”, “Speed Dial 2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab. INFORMATION Bluetooth® BY SPEED DIAL Calls can be made using registered phone numbers which can be selected from a phonebook. (See “REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL” on page 186 for registering the speed dial.) This can be operated while driving. CALLS CAN BE MADE BY CALL HISTORY WHICH HAS 4 FUNCTIONS All: all calls (missed, incoming or outgoing) Up to 25 call history items can be selected from the “All” tab while driving. Missed: calls that were missed Incoming: calls that were received Outgoing: calls that were made 1 Select “Speed Dials”. 163 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 PHONE ●Depending on the type of phone: • It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring phonebook data. • The registered image on the phonebook may not appear when phonebook data is transferred. BY CALL HISTORY 1. PHONE OPERATION 1 Select “Call History”. CALLS CAN BE MADE USING THE LATEST CALL HISTORY ITEM 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select the desired data from the list. 2 Press the switch on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen. 3 Press the switch on the steering wheel to select the latest history item. 4 Select or press the switch on the steering wheel to call the latest history item.  The list to be displayed can be changed by selecting the “All”, “Missed”, “Incoming” or “Outgoing” tab. 3 Select or press the the steering wheel. 164 RX450h/350_Navi_U switch on  When making a call by phonebook, the name (if registered) is displayed.  When making a call to the same number continuously, only the most recent call is listed in call history.  When a phone number registered in the phonebook is received, the name and the number are displayed.  Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.  International phone calls may not be made depending on the type of cellular phone you have. 1. PHONE OPERATION BY VOICE RECOGNITION Calls can be made by giving a voice command. (For the operation and command of voice recognition, see “VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on page 330.) This can be operated while driving. 2 Say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a registered contact. PHONE  In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Call ”, after saying “Call” say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a contact. For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”, “Mary Davis”, “Mobile”  There are 4 types of phones: Home, Mobile, Office and Other.  Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change names in the phonebook to full names.  Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”. 4  When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.  When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list. VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME 1 Press the talk switch.  “Call ” is displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.  When “Call ” on the “Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phonebook’s voice command recognition cannot be used. Check the Bluetooth® connection and if the contacts have been transferred to the navigation system. 3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number. 165 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER 1 Press the talk switch.  “Dial ” is displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.  When “Dial ” on the “Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone number voice recognition cannot be used. Check the Bluetooth® phone connection. 2 Say the phone number.  In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Dial ”, after saying “Dial” say the phone number.  Say the phone number one digit at a time. For example, if the phone number is 2345678: Say “two three four five six seven eight” Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty seven eight”  The system can recognize the following types of phone numbers: 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611) 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers) 10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number) 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)  As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number without stopping.  When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list. 3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number. 166 RX450h/350_Navi_U ■ INTERNATIONAL CALL To dial a phone number that is not a 3, 7, 10 or 11 digit number, for example an international number, use “International Call”. 1 Go to the “Main Menu” screen by pressing the talk switch on the steering wheel and saying “Main menu” or select “Main Menu”. 2 Say “Use the phone”. 3 Say “International call”.  Up to 24 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized. Calling without the voice recognition: After the desired phone number is displayed, a call can also made by pressing the switch on the steering wheel. Canceling the voice recognition: The voice recognition will be canceled when either of the following is performed: • Press and hold the talk switch. • Select “Cancel”. 1. PHONE OPERATION CALLING USING AN SMS/ MMS MESSAGE Calls can be made to an SMS (Short Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) message sender’s phone number. This can be operated while driving. 1 Select “Messages”. BY POI CALL A call can be made by selecting when it is displayed on the screen from the navigation system. (See “TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET” on page 43 and “VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE INFORMATION” on page 357.) 4 PHONE  When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”. (See page 190.) 2 Select the “SMS/MMS” tab and then select the desired received message from the list.  The tab display may vary depending on the type of cellular phone. 3 Select or press the the steering wheel. switch on 167 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE When a call is received, this screen is displayed with a sound. 1 Select or press the switch on the steering wheel to talk on the phone. To refuse to receive the call: Select or press the switch on the steering wheel. To adjust the volume of a received call: Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel. INFORMATION ●During international phone calls, the other party’s name or number may not be displayed correctly depending on the type of cellular phone you have. ●The incoming call display mode can be set. (See “INCOMING CALL DISPLAY” on page 195.) 168 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE While talking on the phone, this screen is displayed. The operations outlined below can be performed on this screen. To hang up the phone: Select or press the switch on the steering wheel. To mute your voice: Select “Mute”. To input a key: Select “0-9”. To transfer the call: Select “Handset Mode” to change from hands-free call to cellular phone call. Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from cellular phone call to hands-free call. ●Changing from hands-free call to cellular phone call is not possible while driving. ●When cellular phone call is changed to hands-free call, the hands-free screen will be displayed and its functions can be operated on the screen. ●Changing between cellular phone call and hands-free call can be performed by operating the cellular phone directly. ●Transferring methods and operations will be different depending on the type of cellular phone you have. ●For the operation of the cellular phone, see the manual that comes with it. 4 WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9” PHONE To adjust the volume of the other party’s voice: Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel. To adjust your voice volume that the other party hears from their speaker: Select “Transmit Volume” and select “-” or “+” to adjust the transmit volume. Select “OK”. INFORMATION INPUTTING A KEY Inputting a key is not possible while driving. 1 Select the desired number to input the key. To hang up the phone: Select or press the switch on the steering wheel. 169 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION TONE SIGNAL If a continuous tone signal is registered in a phonebook, this screen appears. (If not registered, “Send” and “Clear” are not displayed.) This can be operated while driving. 1 Confirm the number displayed on the screen and select “Send”. The number before marked sign will be sent.  When “Clear” is selected, this function is finished and the normal tone screen appears. To hang up the phone: Select or press the switch on the steering wheel. 170 RX450h/350_Navi_U INFORMATION ●The continuous tone signal is the marked sign (p or w) and the number that follows the phone number. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1) ●When the “p” pause tone is used, after waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after user operation. ●This operation can be done when it is desirable to operate an answering machine or use a telephone service in a bank for example. The phone number and the code number in the phonebook can be registered. BY VOICE RECOGNITION “Send Tones” can be operated by giving a command during a call.  The operating procedure is similar to other voice recognition operations. (For the operation of voice recognition, see “VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on page 330.) 1. PHONE OPERATION INCOMING CALL WAITING When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, this screen is displayed. 1 Select or press the switch on the steering wheel to start talking with the other party. INFORMATION ●If your cellular phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used. ●The ring tone that has been set in the “Phone Sound Settings” screen sounds when there is an incoming call. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, both the navigation system and Bluetooth® phone may sound simultaneously when there is an incoming call. (See “RING TONE SETTING” on page 176.) 4 PHONE  Select or press the switch on the steering wheel to refuse the call.  Each time is selected or the switch on the steering wheel is pressed during an interrupted call, the party who is on hold will be switched. 171 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION 7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION Received messages can be forwarded from the connected Bluetooth® phone, enabling checking and replying using the navigation system (Quick reply). 4 Select the screen button corresponding to the desired message. CHECKING MESSAGES 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 3 Select “Messages”.  Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.  When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”. (See page 190.)  Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone’s registered mail address folder. Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed. 5 Messages can be checked.  Selecting “Previous” or “Next” displays the previous or next message.  Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.  The text of the message is not displayed while driving. 6 Select “Play” to start reading out of the message. Select “Stop” to stop the function.  Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel to adjust the message read out volume.  The message read out function is available even while driving. 172 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION  When the received message is an e-mail and “Update Message Read Status on Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark as Unread” or “Mark as Read” can be selected. Select “Mark as Unread” to mark mails that have been read on the Bluetooth® phone as unread. Conversely, select “Mark as Read” to mark mails that have not been read on the Bluetooth® phone as read. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page 190.)  For SMS/MMS, selecting or pressing the switch on the steering wheel calls the sender. (See page 167.)  Select “Reply” to reply to the message. (See page 173.) REPLYING (QUICK REPLY) 1 Select “Reply”. 2 Select the screen button corresponding to the desired message. 4 PHONE 3 Select “Send”.  While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed. 4 This screen will be displayed if message delivery fails.  Select “Retry” to attempt to send the message again or select “Cancel” to cancel. 173 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION EDITING REPLY MESSAGES 1 Reply messages can be edited while the vehicle is parked. Select “Edit”. 2 Select the screen button corresponding to the desired message. 3 Select “OK” when editing is completed. 4 Select . 174 RX450h/350_Navi_U NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION If “New Message Pop-up” and “New Message Voice Notification” are set to “On”, a notification appears on the screen and a voice notification will be heard when a new message arrives. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page 190.) 1 Select “Read” to check the message.  The “Messages” screen will be displayed.  When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to “On”, the message will be automatically read out. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page 190.)  For SMS/MMS, selecting or pressing the switch on the steering wheel calls the sender. (See page 167.)  To check the message later, select “Ignore” or . 2. SETUP 1. PHONE SETTINGS The phonebook can be edited. Volume, display and message settings can also be changed. 4 Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. PHONE SOUND SETTINGS 2 Select “Setup”. The call, transmit and ring tone volume can be adjusted. A ring tone can be selected. PHONE 1 Select “Phone Sound Settings”. 3 Select “Phone”. 2 Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. 3 When all settings are completed, select “Save”. 175 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 2. SETUP INFORMATION ●The system will automatically increase the volume when the speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h). RING TONE SETTING 1 Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen. 2 Select the screen button corresponding CALL VOLUME SETTING 1 Select “Call Volume” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen. 2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the call volume. 3 Select “OK”. TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING 1 Select “Transmit Volume” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen. 2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the transmit volume. 3 Select “OK”. INFORMATION ●The sound quality of the voice heard from the other party’s speaker may be negatively impacted. RING TONE VOLUME SETTING 1 Select “Ring Tone Volume” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen. 2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ring tone volume. 3 Select “OK”. 176 RX450h/350_Navi_U to the desired ring tone.  Ring tones can be heard by selecting the screen buttons. 3 Select “OK”. INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS The settings can be initialized. 1 Select “Default” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen. 2 Select “Yes”. 2. SETUP PHONEBOOK The call history can be deleted and phonebook and speed dial settings can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Phonebook”. SETTING THE PHONEBOOK The phonebook can be transferred from a Bluetooth® phone to the system. The phonebook also can be added, edited and deleted. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen. 4 Select “Manage Contacts”. 4 PHONE 5 Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. 5 Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. INFORMATION ●Phonebook data is managed independently for every registered phone. When one phone is connected, another phone’s registered data cannot be read. 177 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP ■ THE “Contacts” SCREEN CAN ALSO BE DISPLAYED 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Options”. 4 Select “Manage Contacts”. 178 RX450h/350_Navi_U ■ TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUMBER The phone numbers in a Bluetooth® phone can be transferred to the system. The system can manage up to 5 phonebooks. Up to 1000 contacts (maximum of 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each phonebook. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones. If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot be transferred. 2. SETUP For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones 1 Select “Transfer Contacts”.  This screen appears while transferring. To cancel this function, select “Cancel”. 2 Select “Update Contacts”.  If another Bluetooth® device is connected when transferring phonebook data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth® device may need to be disconnected. PBAP compatible models automatic 4 data transfer setting tem using the Bluetooth® phone. 1 Select “Transfer Contacts”.  This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.  Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring phonebook data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone. 179 RX450h/350_Navi_U PHONE 3 Transfer the phonebook data to the sys- When a PBAP compatible phone is connected, the phone’s phonebook data can be automatically transferred. 2. SETUP 2 Select “Automatically Download Contacts” to transfer the phonebook from a connected cellular phone. Select “Automatically Download Call History” to transfer the call history from a connected cellular phone. For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones 1 Select “Transfer Contacts”. 2 Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contacts”. 3 Select “On”. 4 Select “Save”. INFORMATION ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, the registered image on the phonebook may not appear when phonebook data is transferred. 180 RX450h/350_Navi_U  If the phonebook contains phonebook data, this screen is displayed. 2. SETUP 3 Transfer the phonebook data to the system using a Bluetooth® phone.  Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring phonebook data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone. From “Contacts” screen Phonebooks of PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible phones can also be transferred from the “Contacts” screen. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Transfer”. 4 When the transfer is complete, “Done” will appear on the screen. Select “Done”. 4 PHONE  This screen appears while transferring. To cancel this function, select “Cancel”. If “Add Contacts” is selected and there is an interruption during the transfer of data, the phonebook data transferred until then will be stored in the system. This is not the case when “Cancel” is selected.  This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone. 4 This screen is displayed. The following operations are performed in the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen. When another Bluetooth® device is connected  When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.  To disconnect it, select “Yes”. 181 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP ■ REGISTERING BOOK DATA THE PHONE- 4 Select the phone type. The phonebook data can be registered. Up to 3 numbers per person can be registered. New phonebook data cannot be added for PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones. 1 Select “New Contact”. 5 When 2 or less numbers in total are reg- istered to this contact, this screen is displayed. 2 Use the software keyboard to input the name and select “OK”.  To add a number to this contact, select “Yes”. ■ EDITING DATA 3 Input the phone number and select “OK”.  To use a tone signal after the phone number, input the tone signal too. 182 RX450h/350_Navi_U THE PHONEBOOK The phone number can be registered in “Phone # 1”, “Phone # 2” and “Phone # 3” separately. Phonebooks cannot be edited for PBAP compatible ® Bluetooth phones via the navigation system. 2. SETUP 1 Select “Edit Contacts”. ■ THE “Edit Contact” SCREEN CAN ALSO BE DISPLAYED From the “Contact” screen 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select the desired data to edit. 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select the desired data from the list on the “Contacts” screen. 4 Select “Options”. 4 PHONE 3 Select the desired name or number. 5 Select “Edit”. 4 Edit the name or the number. (See “REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOK DATA” on page 182.) 5 Select “Save” when editing is completed. 183 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP From the “Call History” screen 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select the desired number from the list on the “Call History” screen. 4 Select “Add to Contacts” or “Update Contact”. 5 If “Update Contact” has been selected, this screen will be displayed. Select the desired data from the list. ■ DELETING THE PHONEBOOK DATA The data can be deleted. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, delete all your data on the system. For PBAP compatible phones, delete the phonebook data after setting “Automatically Download Contacts” to “Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models automatic data transfer setting” on page 179.) 1 Select “Delete Contacts”. 2 Select the desired data or “Select All”, then select “Delete”.  Multiple data can be selected and deleted at the same time. 3 Select “Yes”. 184 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP ■ ALTERNATIVE PHONEBOOK DATA DELETION METHOD PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible models Speed dials can be registered and deleted. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. SPEED DIALS SETTING Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” 2 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Set- 3 Select the desired data from the list on 4 Select “Manage Speed Dials”. screen. tings” screen. the “Contacts” screen. 4 Select “Options”. 4 PHONE 5 Perform each setting according to the 5 Select “Delete”. procedures outlined on the following pages. 6 Select “Yes”. INFORMATION ●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, the phonebook data will be deleted at the same time. 185 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP ■ THE “Speed Dials” SCREEN CAN ALSO BE DISPLAYED From the “Speed Dial” screen 4 Select “Manage Speed Dials”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Options”. ■ REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL Speed dial numbers can be registered by selecting the desired number from the phonebook. Up to 18 numbers per phone can be registered as a speed dial. 1 Select “New”. From the “Contacts” screen 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Options”. 186 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 Select the desired data to be registered. 2. SETUP 3 Select the desired phone number. ■ THE SPEED DIAL CAN ALSO BE REGISTERED From the “Speed Dial” screen 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 4 Select the desired speed dial location. 2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “(add new)”. 4 PHONE 5 If a location that is already in use is selected, this screen will be displayed.  Select “Yes” to replace it. 6 When this screen is displayed, the oper- 4 Select “Yes” to set new speed dial. 5 Select the desired data to be registered. ation is complete. 187 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP 6 Select the desired phone number. 6 This screen is displayed. From the “Contact” screen  The following operations are performed in the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. ■ DELETING THE SPEED DIAL The speed dial can be deleted. 1 Select “Delete”. 3 Select the desired data from the list on the “Contacts” screen. 4 Select “Options”. 2 Select the desired data, or to delete all the data select “Select All”, then select “Delete”. 5 Select “Set Speed Dial”.  Multiple data can be selected and deleted at the same time. 3 Select “Yes”. 188 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP DELETING CALL HISTORY The call history can be deleted. For PBAP compatible phones, delete the call history after setting “Automatically Download Call History” to “Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models automatic data transfer setting” on page 179.) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen. 4 Select “Delete Call History”. 6 Select the desired data, or to delete all the data select “Select All”, then select “Delete”.  Multiple data can be selected and deleted at the same time. 7 Select “Yes”. ■ THE CALL HISTORY CAN ALSO 4 BE DELETED Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen. 5 Select the desired history to be deleted. 3 Select “Delete”. 189 RX450h/350_Navi_U PHONE 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2. SETUP 4 This screen is displayed. 4 Select “Delete”.  The following operations are performed in the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.  Other call history can be operated similarly. 5 Select “Yes”. Deleting after call history has been displayed 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen. MESSAGE SETTINGS Message settings can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Messaging Settings”. 3 Select the desired history to be deleted. 5 Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. 6 Select “Save” when each setting is completed. 190 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP THE “Messaging Settings” SCREEN CAN ALSO BE DISPLAYED 1 Press the “MENU” button on the No. Function Select to set message forwarding from cellular phones to “On” or “Off”. Remote Touch, then select “Phone”. Select to set the new message notification display to “On” or “Off”.  The “Phone” screen can be displayed by pressing on the steering wheel. Select to set the new message voice notification to “On” or “Off”. 2 Select “Messages” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Options”. Select to adjust the new message notification volume. (See “NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUME SETTINGS” on page 192.) Select a new message voice notification tone. (See “NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TONE SETTINGS” on page 192.) SCREEN FOR “Messaging Settings” Select to adjust the message read out volume. (See “MESSAGE READ OUT VOLUME SETTINGS” on page 193.) Select to set the cellular phone’s message read and unread status update function to “On” or “Off”. Select to edit quick reply messages. (See “EDIT QUICK REPLY MESSAGES” on page 193.)  To reset all setup items, select “Default”. INFORMATION ●Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.  On this screen, the following functions can be operated: 191 RX450h/350_Navi_U PHONE Select to set the automatic message read out function to “On” or “Off”. 4 2. SETUP NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUME SETTINGS NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TONE SETTINGS The new message notification volume can be adjusted. A new message voice notification tone can be selected. 1 Select “New Message Notification 1 Select “New Message Notification 2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the new mes- 2 Select the desired new message notifi- 3 Select “OK”.  New message notification tones can be heard by selecting the screen buttons. Volume”. sage notification volume. INFORMATION ●The system will automatically increase the volume when the speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h). 192 RX450h/350_Navi_U Tone”. cation tone. 3 Select “OK”. 2. SETUP MESSAGE READ OUT VOLUME SETTINGS EDIT QUICK REPLY MESSAGES Message read out volume can be adjusted. Quick reply messages can be edited. 15 messages have already been stored. 1 Select “Message Readout Volume”. 1 Select “Edit Quick Reply Messages”. 2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the message 2 Select the screen button corresponding 3 Select “OK”. 3 Use the software keyboard to edit the read out volume. 4 to the desired message. PHONE INFORMATION ●The system will automatically increase the volume when the speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h). message. 4 Select “OK”. 193 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS The settings can be initialized. 1 Select “Default”. PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS The phone display settings can be changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Phone Display Settings”. 2 Select “Yes”. 5 Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. 6 When each setting is completed, select “Save”. 194 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP SCREEN FOR “Phone Display Settings”  On this screen, the following functions can be operated: No. INCOMING CALL DISPLAY The type of incoming call display can be selected. 1 Select “Incoming Call Display Mode”. Function 4 For PBAP compatible models, select to set the display of the automatic phonebook transfer completion message to “On” or “Off”. PHONE Select to change the incoming call display. (See “INCOMING CALL DISPLAY” on page 195.) 2 Select “Full Screen” or “Drop Down”. For PBAP compatible models, select to set the display of the automatic call history transfer completion message to “On” or “Off”. For PBAP compatible models, select to set the display of images during calls to “On” or “Off”. For PBAP compatible models, select to set the orientation of images displayed during calls. (See “ROTATING CONTACT IMAGES” on page 196.) Screen button Function “Full Screen” When a call is received, the hands-free screen is displayed and it can be operated on the screen. “Drop Down” The message is displayed on the upper side of the screen and it can only be operated via the steering wheel switches.  To reset all setup items, select “Default”. INFORMATION ●Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available even if the phone is PBAP compatible. 3 Select “Save”. 195 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP ROTATING CONTACT IMAGES For PBAP compatible models, when “Contact Image for Incoming Calls” is set to “On”, images stored together with phone numbers in the cellular phone’s phonebook will be transferred and displayed during the incoming call. The orientation of the image can be set. INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS The settings can be initialized. 1 Select “Default”. 1 Select “Rotate Contact Images”. 2 Select “Yes”. 2 Select the desired orientation of the image to be displayed. 3 Select “Save”. 196 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS A Bluetooth® device can be set up. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. REGISTERED DEVICES A Bluetooth® device can be registered, deleted or set up. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Registered Devices”. 2 Select “Setup”. 4 PHONE 5 Perform each setting according to the 3 Select “Bluetooth*”. 4 Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. procedures outlined on the following pages. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 197 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE Bluetooth® devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. Phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered. 1 Select “Add New” to register a Bluetooth® device to the system.  Search for the navigation system displayed on the system’s screen using your Bluetooth® device, and register the Bluetooth® device. For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it.  A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® phone according to the confirmation message.  To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”. 3 When the connection is completed, this screen is displayed.  If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered” on page 199. 2 When this screen is displayed, operate the Bluetooth® device.  When using the same device, it is not necessary to register it again.  When this screen is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. 198 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE 1 Select “Remove”.  When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.  To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”. When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered 1 When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al- 2 Select the desired device, or to delete all the devices select “Select All”, then select “Remove”. 2 Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”. 3 Select “Yes”.  Multiple devices can be selected and deleted at the same time. 3 Select “Yes”. INFORMATION ●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the phonebook data will be deleted at the same time. 199 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 PHONE ready been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to delete 1 or more. 2. SETUP EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE ■ CHANGING A DEVICE NAME 1 Select “Details”. The Bluetooth® device’s information can be displayed on the screen. The displayed information can also be edited. “Device Name”: The name of the Bluetooth® device which is displayed on the screen. It can be changed to a desired name. • Even if the device name is changed, the name registered in your Bluetooth® device does not change. 2 Select the device to be edited. “Device Address”: The device address is unique to each device. It cannot be changed. • If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been registered with the same device name, the devices can be distinguished referring to the device’s address. “My Phone Number”: The phone number of the Bluetooth® phone is displayed on the screen. Depending on the type of phone, the phone number may not be displayed. “Profiles”: The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth® device is displayed on the screen. “Connect Portable Player from”: There are 2 portable player connection settings available; “Vehicle” and “Portable Player”. 200 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 Select “Device Name”. 2. SETUP 4 Use the software keyboard to input the device name and select “OK”. ■ SETTING PORTABLE PLAYER CONNECTION METHOD 1 Select “Connect Portable Player from”. 5 Confirm the device name and select “OK”. 2 Select the desired connection method. 4 PHONE “Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio system to the portable player. “Portable Player”: Select to connect the portable player to the audio system.  Depending on the portable player, the “Vehicle” or “Portable Player” connection method may be best. As such, refer to the manual that comes with the portable player. 3 Select “OK”. 201 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP SELECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE If more than 1 Bluetooth® phone has been registered, it is necessary to select which phone to connect to. It is possible to select from up to 5 registered Bluetooth® devices (Phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered.) Although up to 5 Bluetooth® phones can be registered in the system, only 1 Bluetooth® phone can function at a time. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Connect Phone”. 5 Select the phone to be connected.  The indicator of the selected Bluetooth® phone will turn on.  If the desired Bluetooth® phone is not on the list, select “Add New” to register the phone. (See page 198.)  The currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s screen button will have a Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s screen button is selected, the Bluetooth® phone can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect. 6 This screen is displayed. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 202 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP 7 When the result message is displayed, the Bluetooth® phone can be used. When a phone is connected while Bluetooth® audio is playing  This screen is displayed, and the Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily. SELECTING PORTABLE PLAYER If more than 1 portable player has been registered, it is necessary to select which portable player to connect to. It is possible to select from up to 5 registered Bluetooth® devices (Phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered.) Although up to 5 portable players can be registered in the system, only 1 portable player can function at a time. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen. When another Bluetooth® device is connected 4 Select “Connect Portable Player”.  When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed. To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 203 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 PHONE Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2. SETUP 5 Select the desired portable player to be 7 When the result message is displayed,  The indicator of the selected portable player will turn on. When another Bluetooth® device is connected  If the desired portable player is not on the list, select “Add New” to register the portable player. (See page 198.)  The currently connected portable player’s screen button will have a Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the currently connected portable player’s screen button is selected, the portable player can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect.  When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed. To disconnect it, select “Yes”. connected. 6 This screen is displayed. 204 RX450h/350_Navi_U the portable player can be used. 2. SETUP DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS ® The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed and changed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the  The information displays the following items: Information “Device Name” This name will be displayed on the device when it is connected. It can be changed to a desired name. “Passcode” The password that was set when the Bluetooth® device was registered can be changed. Device Address The device address is unique to each device. It cannot be changed. Profiles The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth® device is displayed on the screen. (See pages 150 and 269.) Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings”. 5 This screen is displayed.  If it is desirable to change the settings, refer to the following pages.  When the settings have been changed, select “Save”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 205 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4 PHONE Screen button/ Screen item 2. SETUP CHANGING THE Bluetooth® SETTINGS 2 Select “On” or “Off”. The Bluetooth® settings can be changed according to the following procedures. ■ CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power” The “Bluetooth* Power” display shows the following state. When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”: The Bluetooth® device is automatically connected when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. When “Bluetooth* Power” is “Off”: The Bluetooth® device is disconnected, and the system will not connect to it next time.  The “Bluetooth* Power” auto connection state can be set on or off. • “On”: The auto connection is turned on. • “Off”: The auto connection is turned off.  The auto connection state cannot be changed from “On” to “Off” while driving, but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”. 3 Select “Save”.  In the event the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”, Bluetooth® connection will begin. ■ EDITING THE DEVICE NAME 1 Select “Device Name”. 2 Use the software keyboard to input the device name and select “OK”. 1 Select “Bluetooth* Power”. 3 Select “Save”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 206 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP ■ EDITING THE PASSCODE 1 Select “Passcode”. ■ Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS 2 Input a passcode and select “OK”. When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On” and the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the Bluetooth® phone and portable player’s connection status can be displayed. (See “CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”” on page 206.) 1 Select “Display Phone Status” or “Display Portable Player Status”. 4 PHONE 3 Select “Save”. 2 Select “On”. 3 Select “Save”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 207 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth® SETTINGS The settings can be initialized. 1 Select “Default”. 2 Select “Yes”.  If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is changed from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth® connection will begin. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 208 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP 4 PHONE 209 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST) ..................................... 229 1. QUICK REFERENCE............................. 212 HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio ............................................... 229 2. SOME BASICS.......................................... 214 DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID ......................... 229 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 215 LISTENING TO SATELLITE RADIO ........... 230 AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY ................. 215 CHANNEL CATEGORY ................................. 230 TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF ....................................................... 215 PRESETTING A CHANNEL............................ 230 SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 216 DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND NAME........ 231 DSP CONTROL....................................................... 217 TONE AND BALANCE....................................... 217 SELECTING SCREEN SIZE .............................. 218 DVD PLAYER............................................................ 219 AUX PORT ................................................................. 219 USB PORT................................................................. 220 3. RADIO OPERATION............................. 221 LISTENING TO THE RADIO ............................ 221 PRESETTING A STATION ................................. 221 SELECTING A STATION .................................. 222 RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ..... 222 TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT ....................... 223 SELECTING A CHANNEL................................ 231 IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS ............................................. 232 6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST)..................... 234 LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO............. 234 7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION ............. 235 INSERTING A DISC............................................. 235 EJECTING A DISC............................................... 235 PLAYING A DISC.................................................. 236 PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC ........................... 236 PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC ................. 238 OPERATING A DVD DISC ............................... 241 PLAYING A DVD DISC ..................................... 242 4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION.................................. 224 DVD OPTIONS....................................................... 244 USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY......... 224 DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISC INFORMATION..................................... 254 AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY................................................. 225 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE..................... 227 IF THE PLAYER MALFUNCTIONS ............ 253 8. USB MEMORY OPERATION ........... 256 CONNECTING A USB MEMORY............. 256 PLAYING A USB MEMORY ........................... 257 210 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 1 9. iPod OPERATION.................................. 262 CONNECTING iPod ........................................... 262 PLAYING iPod MUSIC ...................................... 263 USING THE RADIO (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST) .................................. 286 PLAYING iPod........................................................ 286 PLAYING iPod VIDEO ....................................... 266 PLAYING A USB MEMORY .......................... 287 10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION......................................... 269 PLAYING AN AUDIO CD/CD TEXT ....... 289 ® CONNECTING A Bluetooth AUDIO PLAYER ................................................................... 273 PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO........................ 274 11. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES .......................... 279 DISPLAY .................................................................... 280 REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM CONTROLLER .............................. 280 2 PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO....................... 288 3 PLAYING MP3/WMA DISCS ....................... 290 PLAYING DVD VIDEO..................................... 290 USING THE VIDEO MODE............................. 297 CHANGING SETTINGS.................................... 297 4 12. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE 5 CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES) .................. 300 HEADPHONE JACKS ......................................... 281 13. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS .......................... 302 6 HEADPHONES ....................................................... 281 RADIO RECEPTION........................................... 302 VOLUME..................................................................... 281 iPod................................................................................ 303 CAUTION SCREEN.............................................. 281 USB MEMORY....................................................... 304 TURNING THE REAR DISPLAY ON/OFF................................................................. 282 CARING FOR YOUR DVD PLAYER AND DISC......................................... 304 CHANGING THE DISPLAY TO BE OPERATED .......................................................... 282 MP3/WMA FILES ................................................. 306 TURNING THE REAR DISPLAY OFF USING THE REMOTE CONTROLLER................................................... 282 TERMS ......................................................................... 308 CHANGING THE SOURCE .......................... 282 7 8 CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS ............................. 308 9 2 SETUP CHANGING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT.... 283 OPERATION FROM THE FRONT SEATS .................................................... 284 1. AUDIO SETTINGS.................................. 312 10 USING THE RADIO............................................. 285 iPod SETTINGS......................................................... 313 HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS..................... 312 211 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 1. QUICK REFERENCE Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are carried out on the screen. Using the instrument panel Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio/video screen. Using the Remote Touch Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media” to display the audio/video screen. If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown on the panel. 212 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION No. Name Function Page Function menu tab Select the desired radio or media mode screen tab. 216 Function menu display screen Select to control the selected radio or media mode. 216 “ ” button Press to mute/unmute or pause/resume the current operation. — “TUNE·SCROLL” knob Turn to step up and step down the station band, change to the next or previous satellite radio channel, or skip to the next or previous track, DVD chapter, etc. 221, 230, 236, 238, 243, 259, 264, 275 “PRST·TRACK” button Press the “ ” or “ ” button to preset up or down for a station or channel, or to change a desired track, file or chapter. Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down for a station or channel, or to fast forwarding/rewinding for a track, file or chapter. 222, 231, 236, 239, 243, 259, 264, 267, 275 5 Insert discs into the slot. 235 “MEDIA” button Press to display the media control screen. 215 “RADIO” button Press to display the radio control screen. 215 “PWR·VOL” knob Press to turn the audio/video system on and off, and turn to adjust the volume. 215 “ Press to eject a disc. 235 ” button AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM Disc slot 213 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2. SOME BASICS This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/video system. Some information may not pertain to your system. Your audio/video system works when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode. CAUTION ●For vehicles sold in U.S.A.: Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ●Laser products • USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. • THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. 214 RX450h/350_Navi_U NOTICE ●To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio/video system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not operating . 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM Press this switch to operate the voice command system.  For the operation of the voice command system and its list of commands, see pages 330 and 337. The audio split screen can be displayed while the map screen is displayed. For details, see page 47. “PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/ video system on and off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. The system turns on in the last mode used. “RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to display screen buttons for the audio/video sys- 5 tem.  A function that enables automatic return to the previous screen from the audio/ video screen can be selected. See page 53 for details. 215 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS 2 Select “Radio” or “Media”. Using the instrument panel 1 Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button is pressed, the audio control mode changes. 3 Select the desired tab. “RADIO” button: To display the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” and “Apps” tabs on the screen. (Radio mode) “MEDIA” button: To display the “DISC”, “BT Audio”, “AUX” and “USB”/“iPod” tabs on the screen. (Media mode) Using the Remote Touch 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.  Up to 4 tabs can be displayed on the or , located either screen. Select side of the screen tabs, to display tabs from the previous or next page.  The desired audio mode can be found by selecting or and then selecting that audio mode tab.  The “Rear” tab can only be displayed by selecting or on the screen. INFORMATION ●If a disc is not inserted, the DVD player cannot be turned on. ●The DVD player can be turned off by ejecting a disc. ●When radio or media mode is selected, the respective screen buttons are displayed on the screen. ●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated. 216 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DSP CONTROL 1 Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” but- ton. (Using the instrument panel) Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Radio” or “Media”. (Using the Remote Touch) 2 Select SURROUND FUNCTION This function can create a feeling of presence. 1 Select “Surround”. 2 Select “On” or “Off”. . TONE AND BALANCE TONE 3 Select the “DSP” tab to display this screen. How good an audio program sounds is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid and bass. 4 Select the desired items to be set. 5 Select “OK”. AUTOMATIC SOUND LEVELIZER (ASL) The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for increased vehicle noise. A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another. 1 Select the “Sound” tab to display this screen. 1 Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”. 2 Select “On” or “Off”. 217 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM BALANCE 5 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Select the desired screen button. Screen button Function “Treble” “+” or “-” Select to adjust highpitched tones. “Mid” “+” or “-” Select to adjust midpitched tones. “Bass” “+” or “-” Select to adjust lowpitched tones. “Front” or “Rear” Select to adjust the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. “L” or “R” Select to adjust the sound balance between the left and right speakers. 3 Select “Options”. 4 Select “Wide”. 5 Select the desired screen button. 3 Select “OK”. INFORMATION ●The tone of each mode (such as AM, FM and DVD player) can be adjusted. SELECTING SCREEN SIZE Before selecting screen size, it is necessary to insert a DVD disc and select DISC mode. 1 Press the “MEDIA” button. (Using the instrument panel) Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Media”. (Using the Remote Touch) 2 Select the “DISC” tab. No. Function Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, with either side in black. Select to widen the 4 : 3 screen horizontally to fill the screen. Select to widen the 4 : 3 screen vertically and horizontally, by the same ratio, to fill the screen.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. 6 Select “Save”. 218 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DVD PLAYER 1 When inserting a disc, gently insert the disc with the label facing up. AUX PORT The sound of portable audio players connected to the AUX port can be enjoyed. For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”. 1 Press the “MEDIA” button to display the media control screen and select the “AUX” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly to change to AUX mode.  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. NOTICE ●Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot. ●The player is intended for use with 4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only. ●Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving. NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to the system, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may damage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc. ●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal. ●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal. 219 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM INFORMATION CAUTION 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION ●When the portable audio player is not connected to the AUX port, the tab will be dimmed. USB PORT A USB memory/iPod can be connected to the USB port. For details, see “CONNECTING A USB MEMORY” on page 256 and “CONNECTING iPod” on page 262. 1 Press the “MEDIA” button to display the media control screen and select the “USB” or “iPod” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly to change to USB memory or iPod mode.  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. INFORMATION ●When a USB memory/iPod is not connected with the USB port, the tab will be dimmed. 220 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 3. RADIO OPERATION LISTENING TO THE RADIO SELECTING A RADIO STATION 1 Press the “RADIO” button. INFORMATION ●The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. PRESETTING A STATION Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up to 36 stations (6 stations per page x 6 pages) from any of the AM, FM or SAT bands. 1 Tune in the desired station. 2 Select one of the left side screen buttons 2 Select the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” or “Apps” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab. STEP UP AND DOWN THE STATION BAND 1 Turn the knob clockwise to step up the station band or counterclockwise to step down.  To change the preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure. 221 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. (1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the frequency to the screen button. The station’s frequency will be 5 displayed in the screen button. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SELECTING A STATION Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods. Preset tuning: Select one of the mix preset channels on the left side of the screen or press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to select the desired station. The screen button is highlighted and the station frequency appears on the screen. Seek tuning: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK”. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop when a station is found. Each time the button is pressed, the stations will be searched automatically one after another. To scan all the frequencies: Select “SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on the screen. The radio will find the next station and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog” is selected, and then scan again. To stay tuned to a station and stop the scanning, select “SCAN” again. (To set HD Radio™ system, see page 312.) 222 RX450h/350_Navi_U RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS). RBDS mode allows text messages to be received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters. When RBDS is on, the radio can — only select stations of a particular program type, — display messages from radio stations, — search for a stronger signal station. RBDS features are available only when listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM info” indicator is on. SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE 1 Select “Options”. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Select “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to move forward and backward through the program list. A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located. “Traffic”: Select to seek a traffic program station. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on the screen. INFORMATION ●If no traffic program station is found, “No Traffic” will appear on the screen. ●If a traffic program station is found, the name of the traffic program station will be displayed for a while. 3 Select “TYPE SEEK” and the system will start to seek for stations in the relevant program type. INFORMATION ●If no relevant program can be found, “no type” will appear on the screen. 223 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  Once a program type has been set, “TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.  The program list is in the following order: • Classical • Country • EasyLis (Easy Listening) • Inform (Information) • Jazz • News • Oldies • Other • Pop Music • Religion • Rock • R&B (Rhythm and Blues) • Sports • Talk • Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog.) • Alert (Emergency Alert) TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives. Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com. USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY 1 Press the “RADIO” button. 2 Select the “AM” or “FM” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab.  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216.  As a user works through the analog radio stations, (where applicable) the radio receiver will automatically tune from an analog signal to a digital signal within 5 seconds.  An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be displayed on the screen when in digital. The “HD)” logo will first appear in a gray color indicating the station is indeed (an analog and) a digital station. Once the digital signal is acquired, the logo will change to a bright orange color.  The song title, artist name and music genre will appear on the screen when available by the radio station. 3 This screen will be displayed if “Options” is selected. 224 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION  When “Text” is selected, information such as the artist name, song title, album title and music genre of the track being listened to are displayed on the text screen. To display messages from the station, select “Additional Information”.  When “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” is selected, a program type will be searched. Once a program type has been set, “TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen. (See “SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE” on page 222.) AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY TAG 1 Select “Tag” to bookmark the music information. 2 Pull up the lever to release the lock, and lift the armrest. MULTICAST On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have “multiple” or supplemental programs on one FM station. 5 3 Open the cover and connect iPod using an iPod cable.  Each time “Multicast” is selected, the supplemental program changes.  If “Multicast” is selected when tuned to the last of the supplemental programs, the main program will be returned to. 225 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 1 Select “Multicast”. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION  Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.  Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves from the radio into the iPod.  When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the songs which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had been listened to on their radio. 4 Close the console box. INFORMATION ●If tagging the music information fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again. ●HD Radio™ stations can be preset. 226 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Experience Cause Action Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a short period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter or skip. The radio stations analog and digital volume is not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode. None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact the radio station. Sound fades, blending in and out. Radio is shifting between analog and digital audio. Reception issue, may clear-up as the vehicle continues to be driven. Selecting “Analog” can force radio in an analog audio. Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3 multicast channel had been playing. The radio does not have access to digital signals at the moment. This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new station. Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset. The digital multicast content is not available until HD Radio™ broadcast can be decoded and make the audio available. This takes up to 7 seconds. This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to become available. Text information does not match the present song audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ report_radio_station_experiences. No text information shown for the present selected frequency. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ report_radio_station_experiences. 5 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 227 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. 228 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST) HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in the vehicle, a subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is necessary. An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous U.S. states and some Canadian provinces. INFORMATION ●XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM Satellite Radio customer service agreement. ●Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “CH 000” on the radio. For details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID” below. ●All fees and programming are the responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and are subject to change. HOW TO SUBSCRIBE  For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio:  U.S.A. Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987. Canada Refer to www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677. SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services offered by XM Satellite Radio. DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. The radio ID is required when activating an XM service or when reporting a problem.  If “CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio code. 229 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM It is necessary to enter into a separate service agreement with XM Satellite Radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and digital satellite tuner. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION LISTENING TO SATELLITE RADIO 1 Press the “RADIO” button. CHANNEL CATEGORY 1 Select either “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to go to the next or previous category. PRESETTING A CHANNEL 2 Select the “SAT” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly until the “SAT” tab is selected. 1 Tune in the desired channel. 2 Select one of the left side screen buttons (1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the frequency to the screen button. The channel number will be displayed in the screen button.  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. 3 Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob to select the next or previous channel.  Turning the knob quickly allows rapid scrolling through the channel list. 230 RX450h/350_Navi_U  To change the preset channel to a different one, follow the same procedure. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SELECTING A CHANNEL Tune in the desired channel using one of the following methods. Preset tuning: Select the channel selector screen button (1-6) or press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to listen to the desired channel. The selected screen button (1-6) is highlighted and its related information appears on the right side of the screen. To select a channel within the current category: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK”. The radio will change up or down to a channel within the current channel category. DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND NAME 1 Select “Text” to display the artist name and song title currently being listening to. INFORMATION ●Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully displayed.) AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM To scan the currently selected channel category: Select “SCAN”. “SCAN” appears on the screen. The radio will find the next channel in the same channel category, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a channel, select “SCAN” again. 231 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action. Message Ck Antenna Ch Unauth Explanation The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely. A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance. You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose “CH 000” and all free-to-air channels. The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio. No Signal The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. Ch Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. ----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action is required. Ch Unavail The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. INFORMATION ●Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677 (Canada). 232 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION NOTICE ●This XM tuner supports “Audio Services” (Music and Talk) of only XM Satellite Radio and “Text Information*” linked to the respective “Audio Services”. *: Text Information includes, Station Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and Category Name. 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ●This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. ●This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable. INFORMATION 233 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST) LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO One of Apps’s features is the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to use this service, an Apps compatible phone and the navigation system needs to be set. For details, refer to “APPS”. (See page 380.) 1 Press the “RADIO” button.  If a compatible phone is already registered, it will be connected automatically.  If a compatible phone has not been registered or the Bluetooth® connection cannot be completed correctly, select “Connect” to register and/or connect your phone. (See page 197.)  When connection is complete, the application screen can be displayed. 3 Select “View Application Screen”.  The internet radio application screen is displayed.  Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.  By pressing the “RADIO” button, the “Audio” screen can be returned to. INFORMATION 2 Select the “Apps” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly until the “Apps” tab is selected.  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. ●Other applications can be activated while listening to internet radio. ●An iPhone cannot be connected via Bluetooth® and USB connection at the same time. However, it is possible to recharge an iPhone while using Apps by connecting via USB. The system uses the connection method that was used last. Therefore, if connected via USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to reconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®. ●Services requiring a separate contract can also be used.* ●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel. ●If internet radio has never been listened to by activating “Apps” from the “Information” screen, the “Apps” tab will be dimmed. *: For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987. 234 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION For safety reasons, the DVD video discs can only be viewed when the following conditions are met: (a) The vehicle is completely stopped. (b) The “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. (c) The parking brake is applied. While driving in DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard. EJECTING A DISC 1 Press the “ ” button and remove the disc. INSERTING A DISC 1 Insert a disc into the disc slot. INFORMATION  After insertion, the disc is automatically loaded. 235 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ●Under extremely cold conditions, the screen may react slowly or operation sound may become louder. ●If a disc is inserted with the label facing down, it cannot be played. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING A DISC 1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc slot. PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC 1 Select the “DISC” tab.  When CD-TEXT information exists, the name and artist of the CD currently being listened to will be displayed. 2 Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “DISC” tab is selected. : Select to pause the track. : Select to resume playing the track. SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK ■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. , : Select to skip to the next or previous track. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the screen. The player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to the desired track. 236 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN 1 Select the track name screen button to display the CD’s track list. ■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the disc. 2 Select the desired track number. The player will start playing the selected track from the beginning.  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position. REPEATING 5 The track currently being listened to can be repeated. ■ REPEATING A TRACK 1 Select “RPT” while the track is playing.  “RPT” appears on the screen. When the track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” again. 237 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 track groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll through the track list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION RANDOM ORDER Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC 1 Select the “DISC” tab. ■ PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE DISC IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” while the disc is playing.  The file name, folder name and artist name currently being listened to and the disc icon are displayed on the screen. : Select to pause the file. : Select to resume playing the file.  Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a track randomly from the disc currently being listened to. To cancel this function, select “RAND” again. INFORMATION SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER ■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN ●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32 characters can be displayed. , : Select to skip to the next or previous folder. 238 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ ON THE FOLDER LIST SCREEN 1 Select the folder name screen button to display the following folder list screen. ■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the file. 2 Select the desired folder number to display the folder’s file list. From the file list, select the desired file number.  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position. SELECTING A DESIRED FILE 5 ■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 folder groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the folder list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. , : Select to skip to the next or previous file. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the screen. The player will start playing the selected file from the beginning. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to the desired file. 239 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN 1 Select the file name screen button to display the following file list screen. ■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the file. 2 Select the desired file number. The play- er will start playing the selected file from the beginning. , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 file groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll through the file list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the file list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. 240 RX450h/350_Navi_U  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position. REPEATING The file or folder currently being listened to can be repeated. ■ REPEATING A FILE 1 Select “RPT” while the file is playing. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION  Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows: When “RAND” is off • File Repeat Folder Repeat Off When “RAND” is on • File RepeatOff  “RPT” appears on the screen. When the file is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” repeatedly until the repeat mode turns off. ■ REPEATING A FOLDER 1 Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.  When the folder is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the folder and play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” again. Files or folders can be automatically and randomly selected. ■ PLAYING FILES FROM ONE FOLDER IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” while the disc is playing. ■ PLAYING THE FILES IN ALL THE FOLDERS ON THE DISC IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.  Once “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a file randomly from all of the existing folders. To cancel this function, select “RAND” again. 5 INFORMATION ●When a file is skipped or the system is inoperative, select “RAND” to reset. OPERATING A DVD DISC The playback condition of some DVD discs may be determined by the DVD software producer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. As such some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual that comes with the individual DVD disc. For detailed information about DVD video discs, see “DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISC INFORMATION” on page 254. 241 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM RANDOM ORDER  Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows: • Random (1 Folder Random) Folder Random (1 Disc Random) Off  Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a file randomly from the folder currently being listened to. To cancel this function, select “RAND” repeatedly until the random mode turns off. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PRECAUTIONS ON DVD VIDEO DISC When recording with a DVD video, audio tracks may not record in some cases while the menu is displayed. As audio will not play in this case, verify that the video tracks are playing and then activate playback. When playback of a disc is completed: If an audio CD or MP3/WMA disc is playing, the first track or file starts. If a DVD video is playing, playback will stop or the menu screen will be displayed. The title/chapter number and playback time display may not appear while playing back certain DVD video discs. PLAYING A DVD DISC 1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc slot. 2 Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “DISC” tab is selected. CAUTION ●Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume. 242 RX450h/350_Navi_U  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216.  Select “Options” on the “DVD” screen, then select “Wide” on the “DVD Options” screen. The screen mode can be changed.  If “Full Screen” is selected when the vehicle is completely stopped and the parking brake is applied, the video screen returns. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DISPLAYING DVD CONTROLS DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO CONTROLS Screen button Function “Top Menu”, “Menu” Select to display the menu screen for DVD video. The menu control key appears on the screen. (See page 243.)  If is selected, while watching a DVD, the DVD controls will appear. INFORMATION ●If appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to the control is not permitted. Select to pause the video screen. Select to rewind during playback. Select to stop the video screen. Select to resume normal play during pause. ■ CHANGING A CHAPTER 1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” or turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob to change the chapter. 243 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM Select to fast forward during playback and forward frame by frame during pause. 5 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SELECTING A MENU ITEM 1 Select the menu item using , , or and select “Enter”. The player starts playing the disc from the start of the selected item. DVD OPTIONS 1 Select the “DISC” tab. 2 Select “Options”. 3 This screen is displayed.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. INFORMATION ●According to the DVD disc, some menu items can be selected directly. (For details, see the manual that comes with the DVD disc provided separately.) No. 244 RX450h/350_Navi_U Function Page Select to display the title search screen. 245 Select to display the predetermined scene on the screen and start playing.  Select to display the audio selection screen. 245 Select to display the subtitle selection screen. 245 Select to display the angle selection screen. 245 Select to display the screen mode screen. 218 Select to display the image quality adjustment screen. 246 Select to display the initial setup screen. 247 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SEARCHING BY TITLE 1 Select “Search” on the “DVD Options” screen. 2 Enter the title number and select “OK”. CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE 1 Select “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options” screen. 2 Each time “Change” is selected, the language the subtitles are displayed in is changed.  The player starts playing video for that title number.  If the wrong numbers are entered, select to delete the numbers.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. 1 Select “Audio” on the “DVD Options” screen. 2 Each time “Change” is selected, the audio language is changed. CHANGING THE ANGLE The angle can be selected for discs that are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen. 1 Select “Angle” on the “DVD Options” screen.  The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. 245 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE  The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.  When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can 5 be hidden.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Each time “Change” is selected, the angle is changed.  The angles available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT The brightness, contrast, color and tone of the screen can be adjusted. In addition, the display can be turned off and the screen can be changed to either day or night mode. ■ CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT 1 Select “Display” on the “DVD Options” screen. 2 Select “ ” or “ ” to display the desired item to be adjusted. 246 RX450h/350_Navi_U Screen button Function “Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen. “Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the contrast of the screen. “Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the screen. “Brightness” “-” Select to darken the screen. “Color” “R” Select to strengthen the red color of the screen. “Color” “G” Select to strengthen the green color of the screen. “Tone” “+” Select to strengthen the tone of the screen. “Tone” “-” Select to weaken the tone of the screen. 3 After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.  The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is selected. To turn the screen back on, press any button on the audio panel or on the Remote Touch. The selected screen appears. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DVD SETTINGS 1 Select “DVD Settings” on the “DVD Options” screen. 2 Select the items to be set. ■ AUDIO LANGUAGE The audio language can be changed. 1 Select “Audio Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 2 Select the desired language to be heard on the “Audio Language” screen.  If the desired language to be heard cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on page 249.  To return to the “DVD Settings” screen, select . 3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 5 ■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE changed, select “Save”.  This screen will close, and the system will return to the previous screen.  When “Default” is selected, all menus are initialized. The subtitle language can be changed. 1 Select “Subtitle Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 2 Select the desired language to be read on the “Subtitle Language” screen.  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on page 249.  To return to the “DVD Settings” screen, select . 3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 247 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 3 After the initial setting has been 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ MENU LANGUAGE ■ PARENTAL LOCK The language on the DVD video menu can be changed. The level of viewer restrictions can be changed. 1 Select “Menu Language” on the “DVD 1 Select “Parental Lock” on the “DVD 2 Select the desired language to be read 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code on the  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on page 249.  To return to the “DVD Settings” screen, select .  If the wrong numbers are entered, select to delete the numbers.  To return to the “DVD Settings” screen, select . Settings” screen. on the “Menu Language” screen. 3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. ■ ANGLE MARK The multi-angle mark can be turned on or off on the screen while discs that are multi-angle compatible are being played. 1 Select “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 2 Select “On” or “Off”. 3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 248 RX450h/350_Navi_U Settings” screen. “Key Code” screen. 3 Select a parental level (1-8) on the “Select Restriction Level” screen.  To return to the “DVD Settings” screen, select . 4 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. ■ AUTO START PLAYBACK Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically start playing. Certain discs may not play. 1 Select “Auto Start Playback” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 2 Select “On” or “Off”. 3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can be adjusted. 1 Select “Sound Dynamic Range” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”. 3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/ MENU LANGUAGE CODE If “Other” on the “Audio Language” screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or “Menu Language” screen is selected, the desired language to be heard or read can be selected by entering a language code. 1 Enter the 4-digit language code. 2 Select “OK”. 3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings” screen. 249 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  If the wrong numbers are entered, select to delete the numbers.  To return to the “DVD Settings” screen, select . 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION Code Language Code Language 0514 English 0214 Bengali, Bangla 1001 Japanese 0215 Tibetan 0618 French 0218 Breton 0405 German 0301 Catalan 0920 Italian 0315 Corsican 0519 Spanish 0319 Czech 2608 Chinese 0325 Welsh 1412 Dutch 0401 Danish 1620 Portuguese 0426 Bhutani 1922 Swedish 0515 Esperanto 1821 Russian 0520 Estonian 1115 Korean 0521 Basque 0512 Greek 0601 Persian 0101 Afar 0609 Finnish 0102 Abkhazian 0610 Fiji 0106 Afrikaans 0615 Faroese 0113 Amharic 0625 Frisian 0118 Arabic 0701 Irish 0119 Assamese 0704 Scottish-Gaelic 0125 Aymara 0712 Galician 0126 Azerbaijani 0714 Guarani 0201 Bashkir 0721 Gujarati 0205 Byelorussian 0801 Hausa 0207 Bulgarian 0809 Hindi 0208 Bihari 0818 Croatian 0209 Bislama 0821 Hungarian 250 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION Code Language Code Language Armenian 1314 Mongolian 0901 Interlingua 1315 Moldavian 0905 Interlingue 1318 Marathi 0911 Inupiak 1319 Malay 0914 Indonesian 1320 Maltese 0919 Icelandic 1325 Burmese 0923 Hebrew 1401 Nauru 1009 Yiddish 1405 Nepali 1023 Javanese 1415 Norwegian 1101 Georgian 1503 Occitan 1111 Kazakh 1513 (Afan) Oromo 1112 Greenlandic 1518 Oriya 1113 Cambodian 1601 Panjabi 1114 Kannada 1612 Polish 1119 Kashmiri 1619 Pashto, Pushto 1121 Kurdish 1721 Quechua 1125 Kirghiz 1813 Rhaeto-Romance 1201 Latin 1814 Kirundi 1214 Lingala 1815 Romanian 1215 Laotian 1823 Kinyarwanda 1220 Lithuanian 1901 Sanskrit 1222 Latvian, Lettish 1904 Sindhi 1307 Malagasy 1907 Sango 1309 Maori 1908 Serbo-Croatian 1311 Macedonian 1909 Sinhalese 1312 Malayalam 1911 Slovak 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 0825 251 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION Code Language Code Language 1912 Slovenian 2209 Vietnamese 1913 Samoan 2215 Volapük 1914 Shona 2315 Wolof 1915 Somali 2408 Xhosa 1917 Albanian 2515 Yoruba 1918 Serbian 2621 Zulu 1919 Siswati 1920 Sesotho 1921 Sundanese 1923 Swahili 2001 Tamil 2005 Telugu 2007 Tajik 2008 Thai 2009 Tigrinya 2011 Turkmen 2012 Tagalog 2014 Setswana 2015 Tongan 2018 Turkish 2019 Tsonga 2020 Tatar 2023 Twi 2111 Ukrainian 2118 Urdu 2126 Uzbek 252 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SETUP OPERATION FROM THE REAR SEAT Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system This screen appears when a rear passenger selects the setup menu. If the player or another unit equipped with the player malfunctions, the audio/ video system will display a message. These are described below. If “Check DISC” appears on the screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. If a disc which is not playable is inserted, “Check DISC” will also appear on the screen. For appropriate discs for the player, see “AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS” on page 302. If “Region code error” appears on the screen: It indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly. 5 If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. INFORMATION ●If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA files only, the CD-DA files can be played. If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA files and files other than CD-DA files, only MP3/WMA files can be played. 253 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  Front passengers can cancel this setup operation by selecting “Play”. The player will resume normal play.  Likewise, a rear passenger can cancel a front passenger’s selection of the setup menu.  To lock the rear seat entertainment system, see “OPERATION FROM THE FRONT SEATS” on page 284. IF THE PLAYER MALFUNCTIONS 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISC INFORMATION DVD VIDEO DISCS This DVD player conforms to NTSC/ PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to another format such as SECAM cannot be used. Region codes: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating which countries the DVD video disc can be played in on this DVD player. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player, “Region code error” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, there are cases when it cannot be used. 254 RX450h/350_Navi_U ■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEO DISCS NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PAL format of color TV. Indicates the number of audio tracks. Indicates the number of language subtitles. Indicates the number of angles. Indicates the screen to be selected. Wide screen: 16:9 Standard: 4:3 Indicates a region code by which this video disc can be played. ALL: in all countries Number: region code 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY • Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played. • Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movie can be played. • Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs can be played.  Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 255 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help users enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video. Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with a level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes. Multi-angle feature: The same scene can be enjoyed from different angles. Multi-language feature: The subtitle and audio language can be selected. Region codes: The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. For region codes, see page 254. Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played. Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter. Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio 5 program is assigned as a title. Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. A title comprises of several chapters. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 8. USB MEMORY OPERATION Connecting a USB memory enables users to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. CAUTION CONNECTING A USB MEMORY 1 Pull up the lever to release the lock, and lift the armrest. ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving. NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the system, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc. ●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. ●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. ●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. 2 Open the cover and connect a USB memory.  Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on. 3 Close the console box. 256 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING A USB MEMORY Folder mode PLAYING AND PAUSING A USB MEMORY 1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a USB memory has already been connected. INFORMATION ●If tag information exists, the file/folder names will be changed to track/album names. 2 Select the “USB” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “USB” tab is selected. Tag mode 5 INFORMATION ●When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume playing from the same point it was last used. ●Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. 257 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. : Select to start playing the music. : Select to pause the music. : Select to start playing the music again. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER/ALBUM 2 Select the desired tab and select the desired folder, artist or album. ■ ON THE USB TOP SCREEN , : Select to skip to the next or previous folder/album. SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER, ARTIST OR ALBUM 1 Select the folder/album name screen button. 258 RX450h/350_Navi_U  Character screen buttons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., allow a direct jump to list entries that begin with the same letter as the character button. Each time the same character screen button is selected, the list starting with the subsequent character is displayed. , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 folder/artist/album groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the folder/artist/album list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SELECTING A DESIRED FILE/ TRACK ■ ON THE USB TOP SCREEN FILE/TRACK LIST 1 Select the file/track name screen button to display the following file/track list screen. 2 Select the desired file/track number. The player will start playing the selected file/track from the beginning. , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 file/track groups. If either of these screen 5 buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll through the file/track list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the file/track list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM , : Select to skip to the next or previous file/track. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly until the desired file/track number appears on the screen. The player will start playing the selected file/track from the beginning. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to the desired file/track. ■ ON THE SCREEN 259 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the file/track. REPEATING The file or folder currently being listened to can be repeated. ■ REPEATING A FILE/TRACK 1 Select “RPT” while the file or track is playing.  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position.  Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows: When “RAND” is off • File/Track Repeat  Folder/Album Repeat  Off When “RAND” is on • File/Track Repeat  Off  “RPT” appears on the screen. When the file/track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” repeatedly until the repeat mode turns off. ■ REPEATING A FOLDER/ALBUM 1 Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.  When the folder/album is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the folder/album and play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” again. 260 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION RANDOM ORDER Files or folders can be automatically and randomly selected. ■ PLAYING FILES/TRACKS IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” while the file or track is playing.  Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows: • Random (1 Folder/Album Random)  Folder/Album Random (All Folder/Album Random)  Off  Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a file/track randomly from the folder/album currently being listened to. To cancel this function, select “RAND” repeatedly until the random mode turns off. 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ■ ALL FOLDER/ALBUM RANDOM PLAY 1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.  Once “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a file randomly from all of the existing folders or albums. To cancel this function, select “RAND” again. 261 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 9. iPod OPERATION Connecting an iPod enables users to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. CONNECTING iPod 1 Pull up the lever to release the lock, and CAUTION lift the armrest. ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving. NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc. ●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. ●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. ●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. INFORMATION ●When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery. 262 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 Open the cover and connect iPod using an iPod cable.  Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on. 3 Close the console box. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING iPod MUSIC PLAYING AND PAUSING iPod 1 Press the “MEDIA” button if an iPod has already been connected. 2 Select the “iPod” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “iPod” tab is selected. ●Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard. ●Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. See “iPod SETTINGS” on page 313. It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process. Only the iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed. ●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume playing from the same point it was last used. ●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. 5 SELECTING A PLAY MODE AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. INFORMATION 1 Select “Browse”. : Select to start playing the music. : Select to pause the music. : Select to start playing the music again.  Select “Video” to display the iPod video control screen. 263 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Select the desired play mode. ■ ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN 1 Select the track name screen button to display the following track list screen. SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK ■ ON THE iPod TOP SCREEN , : Select to skip to the next or previous track. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the screen. The player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to the desired track. 264 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2 Select the desired track number. The player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 track groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll through the track list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the player. RANDOM ORDER Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. ■ PLAYING TRACKS IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” while the track is playing.  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position. REPEATING 1 Select “RPT” while the track is playing. ■ PLAYING ALBUMS IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.  “RPT” appears on the screen. When the track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” again.  Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects an album randomly from all of the existing albums on the iPod. To cancel this function, select “RAND” again. 265 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM The track currently being listened to can be repeated.  Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode 5 changes as follows: • Track Shuffle  Album Shuffle  Off  Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a track randomly from all of the existing albums on the iPod. To cancel this function, select “RAND” twice. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING iPod VIDEO When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only output the sound by selecting “Video” on the “iPod” screen. 1 Press the “MEDIA” button. 2 Select the “iPod” tab or press the DESCRIPTION OF iPod VIDEO CONTROLS Screen button Function Select to pause the video screen. Select to rewind during playback. “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “iPod” tab is selected. Select to resume normal play during pause.  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. Select to fast forward during playback. 3 Select “Video” on the iPod top screen. 4 This screen is displayed.  Select “Music” to display the iPod top screen. 266 RX450h/350_Navi_U SELECTING A VIDEO GROUP 1 Select the album name screen button. 2 Select the desired video group. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SELECTING A DESIRED VIDEO ■ON THE iPod VIDEO CONTROLS SCREEN ■ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN 1 Select the file name screen button to display the following file list screen. 2 Select the desired file number. The play“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the screen. The player will start playing the selected file from the beginning. er will start playing the selected file from the beginning. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 file groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is 5 displayed. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll through the file list one by one. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. 267 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the player.  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position. 268 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication. This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function. ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driving. ●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. ●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. NOTICE ●Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. 269 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. CAUTION 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION ●In the following conditions, the system may not function: • The portable player is turned off. • The portable player is not connected. • The portable player has a low battery. ●It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played. ●Portable players must correspond to the following specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player. Also, the different screen is displayed depending on which portable player is connecting. • Bluetooth® Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher) • Profile A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher) AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher) ●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth® devices for this system. 270 RX450h/350_Navi_U The quality of the Bluetooth® connection is indicated as follows: : An excellent Bluetooth®. connection to : Indicates a bad connection to Bluetooth®, resulting in possible deterioration of audio quality. : No connection to Bluetooth®. Indicates the amount of battery charge left. Empty Full 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION  Portable player information is registered when the portable player is connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the Bluetooth® audio information from the system. (See “DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 199.)  FCC ID : AJDK041  This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION ●FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ●This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). ●Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 271 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ●Remaining charge is not displayed while the Bluetooth® device is connecting. ●The amount of charge left does not always correspond correctly with your portable player. ●This system does not have a charging function. ●An antenna for Bluetooth® connection is built into the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may not be good and the system may not function when using a Bluetooth® portable player in the following conditions: • The portable player is obstructed by certain objects (behind a seat or in the glove box or console box). • The portable player touches or is covered with metal materials. ●Leave the Bluetooth® portable player in a place where the condition of Bluetooth® connection is good. U.S.A. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION Canada  IC : 775E-K041  This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. CAUTION ●NOTE Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. 272 RX450h/350_Navi_U CAUTION ●This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). ●The Bluetooth* antenna cannot be removed (or replaced) by user. L’antenne Bluetooth* ne peut pas être supprimé (ou remplacé) par l’utilisateur. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION CONNECTING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a portable player with the system. Once the portable player has been registered, it is possible to listen to the music. Once the portable player has been registered, it is possible to listen to music through the navigation system. (See “REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 198.) INFORMATION ●For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it. WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS OFF Manually connect the portable player in accordance with the following procedure. 1 Select “Connect”. 2 Select the desired portable player. 5  The portable player will be automatically connected under the following conditions: • The “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in either ACCESSORY or ON mode. • When “Bluetooth* Power” is switched from off to on. • When the portable player is disconnected for some reason. 3 When the connection is completed, this screen is displayed. It is now possible to use the portable player. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 273 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS ON 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION ●Selecting “Connect Portable Player” on the “Bluetooth*” screen also connects a Bluetooth® audio player. (See page 203.) ●When none of the selectable portable players have been registered, a screen confirming registration is displayed. Registration method is the same as phone registration. (See page 156.) ●When the currently connected portable player is selected, a screen confirming the selected player’s disconnection is displayed. (See page 205.) ●If connection fails once, a changing connection method confirmation screen is displayed. If connection fails 2 or more times, a message will be displayed. When this message is displayed, try again. RECONNECTING THE PORTABLE PLAYER If the portable player is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® network when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable player.  If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does not happen. Reconnect the portable player manually. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 274 RX450h/350_Navi_U PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYING AND PAUSING Bluetooth® AUDIO 1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a Bluetooth® audio player has already been connected. 2 Select the “BT Audio” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “BT Audio” tab is selected.  For the Remote Touch operation method, see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 216. : Select to start playing the music. : Select to pause the music. : Select to start playing the music again.  Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, the music may start playing when selecting while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when selecting while it is playing. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK/FOLDER/ALBUM ■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN , : Select to skip to the next or previous folder/album. ■ ON THE PLAYLIST SCREEN , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 track/folder groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/ bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/ first page is displayed. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll through the track list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track/folder list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. 1 Select the album name screen button to display the following playlist screen. 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 2 Select the desired screen button.  If the folder name screen button is selected, the track list screen is displayed. 3 Select the desired track name screen button. 275 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the song.  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position. INFORMATION ●Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. ●Some titles may not be displayed depending on the type of portable player. SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK ■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN , : Select to skip to the next or previous track. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the screen. The player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to the desired track. ■ ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN 1 Select the track name screen button to display the following track list screen. 276 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Select the desired track number. The player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. , : Select to move the list up or down by 5 track groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed. “PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll through the track list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track list. , : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name. ●Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. 1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the track.  When the button is released, the player resumes playing from that position. REPEATING 5 The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated. ■ REPEATING A TRACK 1 Select “RPT” while the track is playing.  Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows: • Track Repeat  Album Repeat  Off  “RPT” appears on the screen. When the track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” repeatedly until the repeat mode turns off. 277 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM INFORMATION ■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REPEATING AN ALBUM 1 Select “RPT” repeatedly until “ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.  When the album is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the album and play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” again. RANDOM ORDER Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. ■ PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE ALBUM IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” while the track is playing.  Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows: • Album Random  All Track Random  Off  Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a track randomly from the album currently being listened to. To cancel this function, select “RAND” repeatedly until the random mode turns off. 278 RX450h/350_Navi_U ■ PLAYING TRACKS FROM ALL THE ALBUMS IN RANDOM ORDER 1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.  Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen, the system selects a track randomly from all of the existing albums on the Bluetooth® device. To cancel this function, select “RAND” again. INFORMATION ●Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 11. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES* The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy DVD video. The rear seat entertainment system can be used when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. 5 Name No. Name Front audio/video system Power outlet Displays A/V input port Rear seat entertainment system controller Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks *: If equipped 279 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM No. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DISPLAY A display is installed in the back of each front seat. When audio-video equipment is connected to the A/V input port, rear passengers can enjoy different audio sources on each display. See “USING THE VIDEO MODE” on page 297. INFORMATION ●An insulating sheet is set to prevent the batteries from being discharged. REPLACING THE CONTROLLER BATTERIES Necessary item for replacing two AA batteries. 1 Remove the cover. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM CONTROLLER 2 Remove the depleted batteries and install the new ones. BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (FOR NEW VEHICLE OWNERS) 1 Remove the insulating sheet before using the remote controller. 280 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION HEADPHONES INFORMATION ●If the batteries are discharged, the following symptoms may occur: • The rear seat entertainment system controller will not function properly. • The operational range is reduced. ●When using AA batteries • Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, electric appliance shop, or camera stores. • Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your Lexus dealer. • Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. HEADPHONE JACKS volume. Turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume. 3 Press the knob again. No.  With some headphones generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch signals properly. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless headphones.  Contact your Lexus dealer for further details. VOLUME Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body. CAUTION SCREEN  This screen appears for a few seconds when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. Function To use the headphones, connect them to the jack. To adjust the volume. 281 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 1 Press the knob. 2 Turn the knob clockwise to increase the To listen to the rear audio, use headphones. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION TURNING THE REAR DISPLAY ON/OFF 1 Press the button. TURNING THE REAR DISPLAY OFF USING THE REMOTE CONTROLLER 1 Press the CHANGING THE DISPLAY TO BE OPERATED When the switch is moved to “R”, operations can be performed on the right screen. When switch is moved to “L”, operations can be performed on the left screen. button.  While the display is off, some remote control buttons can be operated. CHANGING THE SOURCE 1 Press the “SOURCE” button to display the audio source selection screen. No. Function Turning on the audio source selection screen Selecting an icon Inputting the selected icon 282 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Select an audio source. CHANGING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT 1 To play the rear audio over the speakers in the vehicle, turn “Speaker Output” on. CAUTION 283 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ●While driving • Do not use headphones. Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ●To prevent accidents and electric shock • Do not disassemble or modify the remote control. ●When the remote control is not used • Stow the remote control. Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ●Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume. ●Removed battery and other parts: • Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION NOTICE ●Cleaning the display • Wipe the display with a dry soft cloth. • If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched. ●To prevent damage to the remote control • Keep the remote control away from direct sunlight, temperature heat and high humidity. • Do not drop or knock the remote control against hard objects. • Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote control. ●For normal operation after replacing the battery, observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: • Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. • Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control. • Do not bend either of the battery terminals. OPERATION FROM THE FRONT SEATS The rear seat display can be operated from the front seats. 1 Press the “MEDIA” button. 2 Select the “Rear” tab. No. Function Turns the rear screen on or off. Locks the system so passengers in the rear seats cannot operate the rear entertainment system. Enables the front speakers to output the front audio/video system’s audio source. 3 Select the desired button. The selected button indicator is highlighted. 284 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION USING THE RADIO 1 Select radio mode on the source screen to display the control screen. TUNING THE STATION/ CHANNEL Using the “TUNE” button 1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “TUNE” until the desired station/channel appears on the screen.  Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of “TUNE” and the stations/channels will be searched automatically one after another. Using the / button 1 Press the or button until the desired station/channel appears on the screen. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM SELECTING A PRESET STATION/CHANNEL  Press and hold the or button until a beep is heard. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station/channel of the nearest frequency. 5  Continue to press and hold the or button after a beep is heard and stations/channels will be sought for automatically. When the or button is released the radio will seek up or down for a station/channel of the nearest frequency. 1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “FOL/ CH” until the desired station/channel band appears on the screen. 285 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION USING THE RADIO (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST) One of Apps’s features is the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to use this service, an Apps compatible phone and the navigation system needs to be set. For details, refer to “APPS”. (See page 380.) 1 Select Apps mode on the source screen to display the control screen. 286 RX450h/350_Navi_U PLAYING iPod When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only output the sound. 1 Connect iPod. (See “CONNECTING iPod” on page 262.) 2 Select iPod mode on the source screen to display the control screen. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING AND PAUSING iPod 1 Press the button. PLAYING A USB MEMORY 1 Connect a USB memory. (See “CON- NECTING A USB MEMORY” on page 256.) SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK 2 Select USB mode on the source screen 1 Press the or button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the screen. to display the control screen. FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING 1 Press and hold the or press and hold the ton. or or button, but5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 287 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING AND PAUSING A USB MEMORY 1 Press the button. 1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “FOL/ CH” until the desired folder/album number appears on the screen. SELECTING A DESIRED FILE OR TRACK 1 Press the or button repeatedly until the desired file/track number appears on the screen. FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING or press and hold the ton. or or button, but- INFORMATION ●Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. 288 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1 Select BT-A mode on the source screen to display the control screen. SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER OR ALBUM 1 Press and hold the PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING AND PAUSING Bluetooth® AUDIO 1 Press the PLAYING AN AUDIO CD/CD TEXT button. SELECTING A TRACK SELECTING A DESIRED ALBUM 1 Select disc mode on the source screen 1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “FOL/ CH” until the desired album number appears on the screen. to display the control screen. 2 Press the or button until the desired track number appears on the screen. SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK 1 Press the or button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the screen. 5 1 Press and hold the or press and hold the ton. or or AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING button, but- INFORMATION ●Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING A TRACK 1 Press and hold the or press and hold the ton. or or button, but- PLAYING OR PAUSING A TRACK 1 Press the button. 289 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION PLAYING MP3/WMA DISCS PLAYING OR PAUSING A FILE 1 Press the SELECTING A FILE 1 Select disc mode on the source screen button. PLAYING DVD VIDEO to display the control screen. 2 Press the or button until the desired file number appears on the screen. SELECTING DVD VIDEO MODE 1 Press the “DISC” button, or select disc mode, to display DVD video. CONTROLLER SELECTING A FOLDER 1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of “FOL/ CH” until the desired folder number appears on the screen. No. FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING A FILE 1 Press and hold the or press and hold the ton. or or Function Selecting an icon button, but- Turning on the DVD mode Inputting the selected icon Playing/pausing a disc 290 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION No. Function Fast forwarding a disc during playback and forward slowly during pause. ■DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO CONTROLS Screen button Function “Top Menu”, “Menu” Turning on the control icon screen Select to display the menu screen for DVD video. (For the operation, see the manual that comes with the DVD video disc provided separately.) Turning on the title selection screen Press and hold to rewind during playback. Stopping the DVD Turning on the menu Selecting a chapter. Press and hold to fast forward or rewind a chapter. Select to stop the video. Select to pause/resume the video screen. Rewinding a disc during playback Press and hold to fast forward during playback and play in slow motion when the player is paused. DVD VIDEO are shown while watching a DVD video and this screen appears. ■DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO SETTINGS 1 Select “Settings” on the control icon screen and this screen appears. “Settings”: Select to display the setting screen. “Hide Buttons”: Select to turn off the icons from the screen. INFORMATION ●If appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to the control is not permitted. No. Function Page Select to display the initial setup screen. 293 Select to display the angle selection screen. 293 Select to display the subtitle selection screen. 292 291 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 1 Press the “OPTION” button if no icons 5 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION No. Function Page Select to display the audio selection screen. 292 Select to display the predetermined scene on the screen and start playing.  Select to display the title search screen. 292 ■CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE 1 Select “Subtitle” on the settings screen. 2 Each time “Subtitle” is selected, the lan- guage the subtitles are displayed in is changed.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. ■SEARCHING BY TITLE 1 Select “Search” on the settings screen. 2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.  When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can be hidden.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. ■CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE 1 Select “Audio” on the settings screen. 2 Each time “Audio” is selected, the audio  The player starts playing video for that title number.  When the or button is pressed, a chapter can be selected.  If the wrong numbers are entered, select to delete the numbers.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. language is changed.  When is selected, the previous screen is displayed. 292 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■CHANGING THE ANGLE ■SETUP MENU The angle can be selected for discs that are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen. The initial setting can be changed. There are initial setting buttons on the “Setup Menu 1” and “Setup Menu 2” screens. 1 Select “Angle” on the settings screen. 2 Each time “Angle” is selected, the angle 1 Select “Setup” on the settings screen. 2 Select the items to be set. is changed.  When is selected, and the previous screen is displayed. 5 changed, select “OK”.  This screen will close, and the system will return to the previous screen.  When “Default” is selected, all menus are initialized. 293 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 3 After the initial setting has been 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■AUDIO LANGUAGE ■DVD LANGUAGE The audio language can be changed. The language on the DVD video menu can be changed. 1 Select “Audio Language” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. 2 Select the desired language to be heard on the “Audio Language” screen.  If the desired language to be heard cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/DVD LANGUAGE CODE” on page 295.  To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, select . 3 Select “OK” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. ■SUBTITLE LANGUAGE The subtitle language can be changed. 1 Select “Subtitle Language” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. 2 Select the desired language to be read on the “Subtitle Language” screen.  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/DVD LANGUAGE CODE” on page 295.  To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, select . 3 Select “OK” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. 294 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1 Select “DVD Language” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. 2 Select the desired language to be read on the “DVD Language” screen.  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/DVD LANGUAGE CODE” on page 295.  To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, select . 3 Select “OK” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. ■ANGLE MARK The multi-angle mark can be turned on or off on the screen while discs that are multi-angle compatible are being played. 1 Select “Angle Mark” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. 2 Select “ON” or “OFF”. 3 Select “OK” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■PARENTAL LOCK The level of viewer restrictions can be changed. 1 Select “Parental Lock” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code on the “Enter Key Code” screen.  If the wrong numbers are entered, select to delete the numbers.  To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, select . ■ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/DVD LANGUAGE CODE If “Other” on the “Audio Language” screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or “DVD Language” screen is selected, the desired language to be heard or read can be selected by entering a language code. (See page 249.) 1 Enter the 4-digit language code. 3 Select a parental level (1-8) on the “Select Restriction Level” screen.  To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, select . 4 Select “OK” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can be adjusted. 1 Select “Sound Dynamic Range” on the 2 Select “OK”. 3 Select “OK” on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. “Setup Menu 2” screen. 2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”. 3 Select “OK” on the “Setup Menu 2” screen. 295 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ■SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE  If the wrong numbers are entered, select 5 to delete the numbers.  To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, select . 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ■SETUP OPERATION FROM THE FRONT SEAT This screen appears when a front passenger selects the setup menu.  Rear passengers can cancel this setup operation by selecting “Play”. The player will resume normal play.  Likewise, a front passenger can cancel a rear passenger’s selection of the setup menu. IF THE REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS If the rear seat entertainment system malfunctions, the system will display a message. These are described below. If “Check DISC” appears on the screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. If a disc which is not playable is inserted, “Check DISC” will also appear on the screen. For appropriate discs for the player, see “AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS” on page 302. If “Region code error” appears on the screen: It indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly. Insert a disc with a region code of “ALL” or “1”. If “DISC error” appears on the screen: The following causes are possible: • There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc. • The inside of the player unit may be too hot due to a very high ambient temperature. Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down. If “No music files found.” appears on the screen: It indicates that the iPod or USB has no playable data. If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. 296 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION USING THE VIDEO MODE USING THE PORT SELECTING THE VIDEO MODE 1 Press the “VIDEO” button, or select 1 Open the cover and connect audio/vid- “Rr-A/V” on the source screen to change to video mode.  The A/V input port is composed of 3 input ports.  In VTR mode, different sound/visual modes can be enjoyed for the left and right screens when “Speaker Output” is off. eo device. Color Function Video input port White Left channel audio input port Red Right channel audio input port CHANGING SETTINGS CHANGING TO PAL FORMAT 1 Press the “SETTING” button.  The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio-video equipment is connected to the A/V input port. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. NOTICE ●When the A/V input port is not in use, keep the A/V input port cover closed. Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or a short circuit. 297 RX450h/350_Navi_U AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM Yellow 5 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Turn “PAL VIDEO” on when PAL format equipment is connected to the A/V input port. INFORMATION ●Because the image quality is automatically adjusted when the “LCD AI” indicator is on, brightness and contrast adjustment becomes less effective. SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE 1 Press the “SETTING” button on the  The “PAL VIDEO” indicator is highlighted. SETTING LCD AI controller. 2 Select the “Screen Size” tab. 3 Select “Normal”, “Wide 1” or “Wide 2”. Automatically determines the tone of the video image and sets the contrast to an optimum level, displaying a sharp image. 1 Press the “SETTING” button. ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1 Press the “SETTING” button. 2 Select “LCD AI”.  The “LCD AI” indicator is highlighted. 298 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Select the desired button to adjust color, tone, contrast and brightness. After adjusting the screen, select “OK”. Function “Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen. “Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the contrast of the screen. “Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the screen. “Brightness” “-” Select to darken the screen. “Color” “R” Select to strengthen the red color of the screen. “Color” “G” Select to strengthen the green color of the screen. “Tone” “+” Select to strengthen the tone of the screen. “Tone” “-” Select to weaken the tone of the screen. 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM Screen button  The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is selected. To turn the screen back on, press any remote control button. The selected screen appears. 299 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 12. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES) Some parts of the audio/video system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel. No. Switch Volume control switch “ ” switch “MODE” switch Volume control switch  Press the “+” side to increase the volume. The volume continues to increase while the switch is being pressed.  Press the “-” side to decrease the volume. The volume continues to decrease while the switch is being pressed. 300 RX450h/350_Navi_U “ ” switch Radio To select a preset station/channel: Quickly press and release the “ ” or “ ” switch. Repeat this to select the next preset station/ channel. To seek a station/channel: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard. Repeat this to find the next station/channel. If either switch is pressed during seek mode, seeking will be canceled. DVD player  Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or down to a different track, file or chapter in either direction. To select a desired track, file or chapter: Quickly press and release the “ ” or “ ” switch until the desired track, file or chapter to play is selected. To return to the beginning of the current track, file or chapter, press the “ ” switch once quickly. To select a desired folder: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard to change to the next or the previous folder. Repeat it until the desired folder is selected. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION Bluetooth® audio player  Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or down to a different track or album in either direction. To select a desired track: Quickly press and release the “ ” or “ ” switch until the desired track is selected. To return to the beginning of the current track, press the “ ” switch once quickly. To select a desired album: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard to change to the next or the previous album. Repeat it until the desired album is selected. USB memory/iPod “MODE” switch  Press the “MODE” switch to select an audio mode. Each press changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to use.  To turn the audio/video system on, press the “MODE” switch.  Press and hold the “MODE” switch to mute/unmute or pause/resume the current operation.  Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or down to a different file or track in either direction. To select a desired file or track: Press the “ ” or “ ” switch until the desired file or track is selected. To return to the beginning of the current file or track, press the “ ” switch once quickly. To select a desired folder or album (USB memory only): Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard to change to the next or the previous folder or album. Repeat it until the desired folder or album is selected. 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 301 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 13. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS NOTICE ●To avoid damage to the audio/video system: • Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio/video system. • Do not put anything other than an appropriate disc into the disc slot. INFORMATION ●The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio/video system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. RADIO RECEPTION Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with the radio — it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle. For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther the vehicle is from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as the vehicle moves. Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with the radio are described. 302 RX450h/350_Navi_U FM Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40 km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception. Static and fluttering: These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering. Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, the radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION AM Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere — especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak. Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast. Static: AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or electrical motors. This results in static. XM  “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.  Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. 5  iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.  Alternation or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment. iPod 303 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION COMPATIBLE MODELS The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system. Made for • iPod touch (4th generation) • iPod touch (3rd generation) • iPod touch (2nd generation) • iPod touch (1st generation) • iPod classic • iPod with video • iPod nano (6th generation) • iPod nano (5th generation) • iPod nano (4th generation) • iPod nano (3rd generation) • iPod nano (2nd generation) • iPod nano (1st generation) • iPhone 4 • iPhone 3GS • iPhone 3G • iPhone Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system. USB MEMORY  USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback: • USB communication formats: USB 2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps) • File formats: FAT 16/32 • Correspondence class: Mass storage class CARING FOR YOUR DVD PLAYER AND DISC  This DVD player is intended for use with 4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.  Extremely high temperatures can keep the DVD player from working. On hot days, use the air conditioning system to cool the inside of the vehicle before using the player.  Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make the DVD player skip.  If moisture gets into the DVD player, the discs may not be able to be played. Remove the discs from the player and wait until it dries. CAUTION ●DVD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly. 304 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION DVD PLAYER Transparent/translucent discs Audio CDs DVD video discs 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your player: • SACD • dts CD • Copy-protected CD • DVD audio • Video CD • DVD+R • DVD+RW • DVD-RAM Low quality discs Labeled discs Special shaped discs 305 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION NOTICE ●Do not use special shaped, transparent/ translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc. ●This system is not designed for use of Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs because they may cause damage to the player. ●Do not use discs with a protection ring. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc. ●Do not use printable discs. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc. To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti-static device. MP3/WMA FILES Correct Wrong  Handle discs carefully, especially when inserting them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.  Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)  Remove discs from the players when not in use. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight. 306 RX450h/350_Navi_U  MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) are audio compression standards.  The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CDRW discs.  The unit can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system.  When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or .wma).  The MP3/WMA player plays back files with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropriate file extensions.  The MP3/WMA player can play only the first session when using multi-session compatible CDs. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION  MP3 player: MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display disc title, track title and artist name in other formats.  USB memory: MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unit cannot display track title and artist name in other formats.  WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title and artist name.  The emphasis function is available only when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. SAMPLING FREQUENCY  MP3 files for MP3 player: MPEG1 LAYER3 — 32 to 320 kbps MPEG2 LSF LAYER3 — 8 to 160 kbps MP3 files for USB memory: MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 32 to 320 kbps MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 8 to 160 kbps WMA files for WMA player: Ver. 7, 8 CBR — 48 to 192 kbps Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps (VBR*) WMA files for USB memory: Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps (VBR*) *: Variable Bit Rate  The MP3/WMA player does not play back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded using packet write data transfer (UDF for- 5 mat). Discs should be recorded using “premastering” software rather than packetwrite software.  M3u playlists are not compatible with the audio player.  MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio player.  The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).  When playing back files recorded as VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.  It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA files.  MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the start of playback may be delayed when using discs containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 levels of folders. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  MP3 files for MP3 player: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 — 16, 22.05, 24 kHz MP3 files for USB memory: MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 16, 22.05, 24 kHz WMA files for WMA player: Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz WMA files for USB memory: Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz  The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In order to achieve a reasonable level of sound quality, discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended. PLAYABLE BIT RATES 307 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION 001.mp3 002.wma Folder 1 003.mp3 Folder 2 004.mp3 005.wma Folder 3 006.mp3  The play order of the compact disc with the structure shown above is as follows: 001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3  CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play some damaged discs.  If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/ WMA player, playback will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or CDR disc.  Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double Density CD) system. TERMS PACKET WRITE  MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play up to 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.  USB memory: It is possible to play up to 3000 folders, 255 files per folder or 9999 files in the device.  The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA encoding software you use. CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS  CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be played.  It may not be possible to play CD-R/CDRW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.  It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.) 308 RX450h/350_Navi_U  This is a general term that describes the process of writing data on-demand to CDR, etc., in the same way that data is written to floppy or hard discs. ID3 TAG  This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to a number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. WMA TAG  WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title and artist name. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION ISO 9660 FORMAT  This is the international standard for the formatting of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of regulations.  Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file names, with a 3 character file extension. File names must be composed of one-byte capital letters and numbers. The “_” symbol may also be included.)  Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “.” and file extension). Each folder must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies. m3u  Playlists created using “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3  CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries. WMA  WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio compression format developed by Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and 9. 309 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM  MP3 is an audio compression standard determined by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.  Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION  Gracenote® Agreement End User License This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. 310 RX450h/350_Navi_U You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service. 1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote 311 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time. 2. SETUP 1. AUDIO SETTINGS HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS 4 Select “HD Radio Settings”. HD Radio™ system can be set using the procedure outlined below. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 Select “HD Radio/Analog Setting”. 2 Select “Setup”. 6 Select the item to be set. 3 Select “Audio”. Screen button Function “All” Select to receive both analog and digital broadcasts. “HD Only” Select to receive only digital broadcasts. “Analog” Select to receive only analog broadcasts. 7 Select “Save”. 312 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. SETUP iPod SETTINGS 4 Select “iPod Settings”. When the track currently being played has cover art data, it can be displayed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 Select “Display Cover Art”. 2 Select “Setup”. 6 Select “On” or “Off”. 7 After iPod setting has been changed, AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM select “OK”. 3 Select “Audio”. 313 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 2. SETUP 314 RX450h/350_Navi_U 6 AIR CONDITIONING 1 1 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION 2 1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 316 2. SOME BASICS ......................................... 318 3 CLIMATE CONTROL .......................................... 318 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 318 4 3. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION.......................................... 319 SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE ........................................ 319 5 SETTING THE VEHICLE INTERIOR TEMPERATURE.................................................... 319 ADJUSTING THE SETTINGS MANUALLY......................................................... 320 6 SWITCHING BETWEEN OUTSIDE AIR AND RECIRCULATED AIR MODES.................. 322 7 DEFOGGING THE WINDSHIELD ............. 323 ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF AND OPENING AND CLOSING THE AIR OUTLETS ........................................... 324 8 WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER.................... 325 DEFOGGING THE REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR ................................................... 325 9 OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ........ 326 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 10 OPERATING HINTS......................................... 327 315 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION 1. QUICK REFERENCE Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Climate” to display the air conditioning control screen. *1 *2 *4 *1: Driver side temperature display *2: Outside temperature display *3: Passenger side temperature display *4: If equipped 316 RX450h/350_Navi_U *3 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION No. Name Function Page Driver’s side temperature control buttons Select/press to control the temperature from the driver’s side. When the “DUAL” indicator is on, only the driver’s side temperature is adjusted. 319 Fan speed control buttons Select/press to change fan speed. 320 Air flow control buttons Select/press to change the air outlets. 321 Passenger’s side temperature control buttons Select/press to control the passenger’s side temperature. 319 Windshield wiper deicer button Select to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades. 325 “DUAL” Select to set the temperatures independently for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. 320 “A/C” Select to change the air conditioning system between on and off. 327 Air intake control button Press to change the function between outside air and recirculated air mode. 322 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger button Press to defog the rear window and outside rear view mirrors. 325 Windshield air flow button Press to defog the windshield. 323 “ Press to turn the fan off. 319, 320 Press to use the automatic air conditioning system. 319 “AUTO” button AIR CONDITIONING OFF” button 6 317 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION 2. SOME BASICS CLIMATE CONTROL Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. The “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch must be in ON mode. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. INFORMATION ●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ●To reduce potential odors from occurring: • It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. • The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic operation mode. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 2 Select “Climate” to display the air con- The voice command system can be operated by pressing the talk switch. ditioning control screen.  A function that enables automatic return to the previous screen from the air conditioning control screen can be selected. See page 53 for details. NOTICE ●To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off 318 RX450h/350_Navi_U  For the operation of the voice command system and the list of commands, see pages 330 and 337. 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION 3. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. SETTING THE VEHICLE INTERIOR TEMPERATURE 1 Press the “ ” button on “TEMP” to in- crease the temperature and the “ ” button to decrease the temperature. 1 Press the “AUTO” button. Using the screen 1 Select “ ” to increase the temperature and “ ” to decrease the temperature. 6 AIR CONDITIONING  Press the “ OFF” button to turn the fan off.  If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated are maintained. 319 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION ADJUSTING THE TEMPERATURE SEPARATELY “DUAL” is used to set the temperatures independently for the driver’s side and front passenger side. 1 Select “DUAL”. ADJUSTING THE SETTINGS MANUALLY SETTING THE FAN SPEED 1 Press the button on fan speed control button to increase the fan speed and press the speed.  When the passenger’s side temperature control buttons are selected/pressed, the “DUAL” indicator turns on, and the mode will change to independent mode.  When the “DUAL” indicator is dimmed, the same temperature is set for both the driver’s side and front passenger’s side. Using the screen 1 Select “ ” on to increase the fan speed and “ ” to decrease the fan speed. (7 levels)  Press the “ off. 320 RX450h/350_Navi_U button to decrease the fan OFF” button to turn the fan 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION SWITCHING THE AIR OUTLETS AND AIR FLOW Air flows to the upper body (Panel) The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected manually. 1 Press the air flow control button. Air flows to the upper body and feet (Bilevel) Using the screen 1 Select any mode on the screen. 6 AIR CONDITIONING No. Function Floor/windshield Bi-level Panel Floor 321 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION Air flows to the feet (Floor) SWITCHING BETWEEN OUTSIDE AIR AND RECIRCULATED AIR MODES Type A Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates (Floor/windshield) The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from outside the vehicle), “AUTO” mode and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside the vehicle) each time the button is pressed. 1 Press the air intake control button. No. Function Recirculated air mode “AUTO” mode Outside air mode  The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. INFORMATION ●The setting in automatic mode can be adjusted. (See page 142 and “Owner’s Manual”.) 322 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION Type B The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from outside the vehicle) and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside the vehicle) each time the button is pressed. DEFOGGING THE WINDSHIELD 1 Press the windshield air flow button. 1 Press the air intake control button.  The air conditioning system control operates automatically.  Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode. No. Function Recirculated air mode Outside air mode CAUTION 323 RX450h/350_Navi_U 6 AIR CONDITIONING ●To prevent the windshield from fogging up • Do not use the windshield air flow button during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF AND OPENING AND CLOSING THE AIR OUTLETS Rear center outlets Front center outlets No. Function Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down No. Function Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob to open or close the vent Front side outlets No. Function Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob to open or close the vent 324 RX450h/350_Navi_U Turn the knob to open or close the vent 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades. The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ON mode. 1 Select the windshield wiper de-icer button. DEFOGGING THE REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR This feature is used to defog the rear window and outside rear view mirror. The “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch must be in ON mode. 1 Press the rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger button.  The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. CAUTION  The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface.  The indicator is on when the defogger is operating. 325 RX450h/350_Navi_U AIR CONDITIONING ●When the windshield wiper de-icer is on, do not touch the lower part of the windshield or the side of the front pillars, as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you. 6 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION CAUTION ●When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on, do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror as it can become very hot and burn you. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Outside temperature is displayed on the screen. NOTICE ●When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors. ●To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged, turn the switch off when the hybrid system is off . INFORMATION ●The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. ●If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the switch again. When the surface has cleared, press the button once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause the 12-volt battery to discharge, especially during stop-and-go driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to melt snow. ●If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray deicer before operating the system. 326 RX450h/350_Navi_U  The displayed temperature ranges from -40F (-40C) up to 122F (50C). INFORMATION ●In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change. • When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 15.5 mph [25 km/h]) • When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) ●If the temperature shows “--” or “E”, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS INFORMATION ●Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys • Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch to ON mode will recall that key’s registered air conditioning settings. • When the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle. The system may not operate correctly if more than 1 electronic key is in the vicinity or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door. Settings for the electronic key and the corresponding door can be changed. Contact your Lexus dealer. ●Using the automatic mode • Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur: • Immediately after the “AUTO” button is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow. • Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on. ●Using the system in recirculated air mode • The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period. ●Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes • Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature. 327 RX450h/350_Navi_U 6 AIR CONDITIONING ●Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode (vehicles with hybrid system) In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency: • Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity • Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations: • Adjust the fan speed • Turn off Eco drive mode ●Customization (vehicles with hybrid system) The air conditioning control restriction of Eco drive mode can be changed to the same setting as that used in normal drive mode. For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”. Changing the air conditioning restriction will slightly reduce the Eco drive mode’s fuel efficiency when compared to before the change was made. INFORMATION 1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION ●When the outside temperature exceeds 75F (24C) and the air conditioning system is on • In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption. • Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is turned to ON mode. • It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing the air intake control button. ●Window defogger feature • Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations where the windows need to be defogged. ●When outside temperature approaches 32F (0C) • The air conditioning system may not operate even when “A/C” is selected. ●Automatic air intake change mode In automatic mode, the system automatically switches between recirculated air and outside air modes according to whether the system detects harmful substances such as exhaust gas in the air outside. If automatic mode is selected when only the fans are operating, the air conditioning system will turn on automatically. ●Air conditioning filter • The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air conditioner and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency, or if the windows become to fog up easily. (For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.) ●Customization • Settings can be changed. (For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.) 328 RX450h/350_Navi_U 7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 1 1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 2 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ......... 330 STEERING SWITCHES FOR THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........ 330 3 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ....................................................... 330 4 2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY)............................... 335 5 3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS....................................... 336 4. COMMAND LIST................................... 337 6 2 MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION 7 1. MOBILE ASSISTANT ............................. 341 8 9 10 329 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM The voice command system enables the navigation, audio/video, hands-free and air conditioning systems to be operated using voice commands. The operating procedures of voice commands from the “Shortcut Menu” screen are explained here. INFORMATION ●Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated from the “Main Menu” screen. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 1 Press the talk switch.  After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has been displayed, voice guidance will commence.  Voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing the talk switch. 2 After a beep sounds, say the command of your choice. STEERING SWITCHES FOR THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM Talk switch  Press the talk switch to start the voice command system.  To cancel voice recognition, press and hold the talk switch.  Voice commands are marked with . Some commonly used commands are displayed on the screen.  By saying “Next page” or “Previous page”, or by selecting “Next Pg.”/“Prev. Pg.”, the screen will display the commands displayed on the page in the background.  Saying “Main menu” or selecting “Main Menu” when the “Shortcut Menu” screen is displayed will display the “Main Menu” screen.  Registered POIs, registered names in the phonebook etc., can be said in the place of the “<>” next to the commands. (See page 337.) For example: Say “Find nearby dining”, “Call John” etc.  Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands and operation methods. 330 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 3 Say the command displayed on the screen. INFORMATION ●Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk switch and hearing a beep. MICROPHONE  If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no selections are available, perform one of the following to return to the previous screen: • Say “Go back”. • Select “Go Back”.  To cancel voice recognition, select “Cancel”, or press and hold the talk switch. It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command. INFORMATION INFORMATION ●Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command. ●Voice commands may not be recognized if: • Spoken too quickly. • Spoken at a low or high volume. • The roof or windows are open. • Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken. • The air conditioning speed is set high. • The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone. 331 RX450h/350_Navi_U 7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ●If the navigation system does not respond or the confirmation screen does not disappear, press the talk switch and try again. ●If a voice command cannot be recognized within 6 seconds, voice guidance will say “Pardon?” (“Command not recognized.” will be displayed on the screen) and voice command reception will restart. ●If a voice command cannot be recognized 2 consecutive times, the voice command guidance system will say “Paused. To restart voice recognition, push the talk switch. To cancel voice recognition, push and hold the talk switch.” Then voice recognition will be suspended. ●The voice recognition prompt can be set to on or off when “Voice Prompts” is selected. This setting can also be changed on the “Voice Settings” screen. (See page 66.) ●When “Voice Prompts” is selected, voice recognition will be temporarily suspended. Press the talk switch again. 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION ●In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible: • The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize. • There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise. VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A DESTINATION SEARCH BY ADDRESS (ENGLISH ONLY) 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say “Enter an address”.  If the destination’s state/province has not been set or is not contained in the voice command recognition list, the screen to input a state/province will be displayed. VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCHING FOR A ROUTE TO YOUR HOME 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say “Go home”.  A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. 3 Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.  The system starts searching for a route to your home.  Some areas cannot be recognized by the voice recognition system.  For information regarding the state/ province setting to perform a destination search by address, see “SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA” on page 70. 3 Say “”.  Say the desired city name that belongs to the set state in the place of the “<>”.  Say “Change State” to change the set voice recognition state.  When the voice command is recognized, the map of the area around the home address will be displayed and route guidance to the home address will begin.  If a home address is not registered, voice guidance will say “Your home is not set. Please try again after setting a home location.” and you will be prompted to enter a home address. (See page 112.) 332 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 4 Say “”.  Say the desired full street name, or main body of the street name that belongs to the set state in the place of the “<>”.  The voice command recognition is designed to recognize the main body of the official street name. For example, if the official street name is “East Main Street”, the voice command recognition will recognize “Main”. 5 Say “”.  Say the desired number, cardinal/intercardinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”. For example: Say “West 555”.  Inputting the house number can be skipped. 6 Say “Start guidance” or “Show map”. Al- ternatively, select “Start Guidance” or “Show Map”. ●Even if the state set using voice recognition is different from the set state in the “Address” screen (which was set when a destination was set manually), the set state in the “Address” screen will not change. (For more information on the “Address” screen, see “SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA” on page 70.) ●The house number voice recognition conditions are outlined below: • Numerals: 10 digits or less • Numerals and cardinal/intercardinal direction or a hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say “and”.) • Cardinal/Intercardinal direction or a hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say “and”.) • Numerals are recognized as single digits only. • The cardinal/intercardinal direction and hyphens are only recognized once. • The following cardinal/intercardinal directions can be recognized: North, East, West, South, North East, North West, South East and South West. ●When inputting the house number is skipped and the recognized candidate list has multiple entries and so forth, the full street name may need to be recognized. If this occurs, say the full street name. For example, say “East Main Street” and “East Main Street” will be recognized. 333 RX450h/350_Navi_U 7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM  After this, follow the voice guidance and search for a destination route by voice command operation. INFORMATION 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A TRACK USING ARTIST NAME OR ALBUM NAME 1 Press the talk switch.  “Play Artist ” and “Play Album ” are displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. 2 Say “Play artist ” or “Play album ”.  Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.  A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If multiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed.  When “Play Artist ” is used to play music, the first track is selected randomly. For operations beyond playing music, refer to the “AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM” section of this manual. 3 Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.  The system starts playing music. 334 RX450h/350_Navi_U  Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com. INFORMATION ●A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and playback. (See “USB MEMORY OPERATION” on page 256 and “iPod OPERATION” on page 262.) ●When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so tracks can be searched using voice commands. ●Recognition data is updated under the following conditions: • When the USB memory or iPod data has changed. • When the voice recognition language is changed. (See page 56.) ●While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search cannot be performed using a voice command. ●While “Play Music” is displayed in the “Shortcut menu” screen, say “Play music” to display the music screen from which searching for a track using a voice command can be performed. ●When “Play Music” is dimmed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possible to search for a track using a voice command. In this situation, reduce the amount of music data in the USB memory or iPod and update the recognition data to enable searching by voice command. 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY) Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu. INFORMATION ●The “Set a Destination”, “Use the Phone”, “Play Music” and “Get Information” commands displayed on the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated using natural language speech recognition technology. ●If the command cannot be recognized completely, the command input screen will be displayed. (Search results will be shown based on the part of the command that was recognized.) EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR EACH FUNCTION Command Expression examples Command Expression examples “Dial ” Please dial the number <3334445555>. Ring <3334445555>. “Play Artist ” Play the artist . I’d like to hear the band .* “Play Album ” Play album . Music from album .* *: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”. Command How’s the traffic? Check the traffic. “Weather” What’s the weather like? Let’s get a forecast. “Sports Scores” Team scores. How are my favorite teams doing? “Stock Quotes” Stock quotes. How are my stocks doing? Let’s check fuel prices. Find the cheapest gas prices. “Go Home” “Enter an Address” I wanna enter an address, please. Put in an address. “Fuel Prices” Find nearby for me. I need to see the nearby . INFORMATION “Find Nearby ” “Call ” Get me . I need to call at right away. ●Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be accessed from the main menu. ●For example, to make an “International Call”, say “Main menu” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed. Then say “Use the phone” followed by saying the desired number, e.g. “123456789”. 335 RX450h/350_Navi_U 7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM “Traffic” Let’s go home. Take me home. Expression examples 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS Selecting “On” next to “Expanded Voice Commands” on the “Voice Settings” screen enables voice command operation of the audio/video and air conditioning system. (See page 66.) For more information on operations that can be controlled using expanded voice commands, refer to “COMMAND LIST”. (See page 337.) VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: TURN THE AUDIO SYSTEM ON 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say “Audio on”. INFORMATION ●Commands relating to operation of the audio/video and air conditioning systems can only be performed when the audio and air conditioning systems are turned on. ●Expanded voice commands can be recognized when the “Shortcut Menu” screen is displayed. 336 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 4. COMMAND LIST Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.  All commands are listed in the table.  For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.  The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.  Voice recognition language can be changed. (See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page 56.) “Set a Destination” Action Shortcut Menu “Find Nearby ” Displays a list of near the current position. O “Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the address. O “Go Home” Displays the route to home. O “Call Destination Assist” Connects Lexus Enform with Safety Connect response center. — “Destination by Phone Number”*2 Enables setting a destination by saying the phone number. — Command “Use the Phone” (See “BY VOICE RECOGNITION” on page 165.) Action Shortcut Menu “Call ” Calls made by saying a name from the phonebook. For example: Say “Call John Smith”, “Call John Smith, mobile” etc. O “Dial ” Calls made by saying the phone number. For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial 5556667777” etc. O “International Call”*1 Calls international numbers by saying the phone number. — Command *1: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed. 337 RX450h/350_Navi_U VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM *1: For example; Gas stations, Restaurants, etc. 7 *2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Set a destination” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed. 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION “Play Music” Command Action Shortcut Menu “Play Artist ” Plays tracks by the selected artist. For example: Say “Play artist ”*1 O “Play Album ” Plays tracks from the selected album. For example: Say “Play album ”*1 O “Play Song ”*2 Plays the selected track. For example: Say “Play song Summertime”, “Play song Concerto in A Major” etc. — “Play Playlist ”*2 Plays tracks from the selected playlist. For example: Say “Play playlist My Favorite Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic Hits” etc. — *1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”. *2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Shortcut menu” screen is being displayed. “Get Information” Command Action Shortcut Menu “Traffic” Displays the traffic incident list. O “Weather” Displays weather information. O “Sports Scores” Displays the sports list. O “Stock Quotes” Displays the stocks list. O “Fuel Prices” Displays the fuel prices list. O “Lexus Insider” Displays the Lexus insider list. — 338 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION Navigation command (When destinations are set) When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 336.) Command Action Shortcut Menu “Delete next destination” Deletes the next destination. O “Pause guidance” Pauses the route guidance. O “Resume guidance” Resumes the route guidance. O Select audio mode When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 336.) Command Action Shortcut Menu Sets the audio mode to radio. O “AM” Selects the AM band. O “FM” Selects the FM band. O “Satellite radio” Selects the satellite radio mode. O “Disc” Selects the disc audio mode. O “Auxiliary” Selects the auxiliary audio mode. O “Bluetooth* audio” Selects the Bluetooth® audio mode. O “iPod” Selects the iPod audio mode. O “USB audio” Selects the USB audio mode. O “Audio on” Turns the audio system on. O “Audio off” Turns the audio system off. O 7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM “Radio” *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 339 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION Climate command When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 336.) Command Action Shortcut Menu “Automatic climate control” Turns air conditioning system on and off. O “Warmer” Turns temperature up. O “Cooler” Turns temperature down. O INFORMATION ●Commands that have a “O” in the Shortcut Menu column can be recognized from the “Shortcut Menu” screen. ●Commands that have a “” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be recognized from the screen that they are displayed in. 340 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION 1. MOBILE ASSISTANT The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via Bluetooth®. (See page 156.) 1 Press and hold the on the steering wheel until you hear the beeps that indi- cate the system is listening. 2 The Mobile Assistant can be used only when the following screen is displayed. • After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.  The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knob or steering wheel volume control switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized. INFORMATION ●The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version installed on the connected device. ●Some Siri features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an unavailable function, Siri will inform you that the function is not available. ●If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth®, an error message will be displayed on the screen. ●While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used. ●If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM  To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select “Cancel”, or press and hold the on the steering wheel.  To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the on the steering wheel. • Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a voice command. 341 RX450h/350_Navi_U 7 2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION MICROPHONE It is not necessary to speak directly into the microphone when using the Mobile Assistant. (Microphone location: See page 151.) INFORMATION ●Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant. ●The Mobile Assistant may not recognize commands in the following situations: • When spoken too quickly. • When spoken at a low or high volume. • When the roof or windows are open. • When passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used. • When the air conditioning system’s fan speed is set high. • When the air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone. 342 RX450h/350_Navi_U 8 INFORMATION 1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY 1. FUEL CONSUMPTION....................... 344 FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH HYBRID SYSTEM)............................................. 344 3. XM Fuel Prices ......................................... 357 SHOW XM Fuel Prices INFORMATION................................................. 357 XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS ................................ 358 FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH GASOLINE ENGINE) .................................... 344 4. XM NavWeather™.................................. 361 2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA............................ 346 WEATHER INFORMATION........................... 363 MAP INFORMATION ........................................ 346 XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR .................. 364 CERTIFICATION.................................................... 347 2 XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW 1. XM SERVICES......................................... 348 3 XM FUNCTION OPERATION 1. XM Sports ................................................... 351 2 VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE INFORMATION................................................. 357 SHOW XM NavWeather™ INFORMATION................................................... 361 3 4 WEATHER WARNINGS................................... 364 5 5. XM NavTraffic® ....................................... 365 SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT .................................. 365 SHOW XM NavTraffic® INFORMATION................................................. 366 6 7 4 SETUP 1. XM SETTINGS ......................................... 368 8 RECEIVE SPORTS INFORMATION .......... 352 XM Sports SETTINGS — ADD OR DELETE TEAMS ................................................. 352 9 2. XM Stocks.................................................. 354 RECEIVE STOCK DATA................................... 355 10 XM Stocks SETTINGS — ADD OR DELETE STOCKS.............................................. 355 343 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY 1. FUEL CONSUMPTION FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH HYBRID SYSTEM) 3 Select “Fuel Consumption”. Fuel consumption information, such as that shown below, can be displayed on the screen. For details see Section 1-1 of “Owner’s Manual”.  Energy monitor  Trip information  Past record 4 This screen will be displayed. FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH GASOLINE ENGINE) PAST RECORD Fuel consumption information from recent resets can be displayed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. No. Function Best recorded fuel economy Average Previous fuel economy record Current fuel economy 2 Select “Info/Apps”. 344 RX450h/350_Navi_U  If the “Past Record” screen does not appear, select “Past Record” on the “Trip Information” screen.  The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last update. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.  Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel consumption again.  Past record data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”. 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY TRIP INFORMATION The average fuel consumption of the last 15 minutes can be displayed in oneminute blocks. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps”. 2 Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen. 3 This screen will be displayed. No.  If the “Trip Information” screen does not appear, select “Trip Information” on the “Past Record” screen.  Consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.  Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the “ENGINE START STOP” switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. Function Average speed Elapsed time Cruising range Previous fuel consumption per minute 8 INFORMATION Current fuel consumption per minute 345 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY 2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA MAP INFORMATION Coverage areas and legal information can be displayed and map data can be updated. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Info/Apps”. INFORMATION ●Map data updates are available for a fee. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information. ●The “Map Information” screen displays “Map Version” and “Map Update ID”. This data is needed to perform a map data update. LEGAL INFORMATION Legal information related to the map data can be displayed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps”. 2 Select “Map Data” on the “Information” 3 Select “Map Data”.  The “Map Information” screen will be displayed. 346 RX450h/350_Navi_U screen. 3 Select “Legal Info.”.  The “Legal Information” screen will be displayed. 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY MAP COVERAGE Map data coverage areas can be displayed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps”. 2 Select “Map Data” on the “Information” screen. 3 Select “Map Coverage”.  The “Map Data Coverage” screen will be displayed. CERTIFICATION For vehicles sold in Canada  This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.  Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.  This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.  Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable. 8 INFORMATION 347 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW 1. XM SERVICES XM services are subscription-based XM Satellite Radio services to provide convenient features to subscribers.  With an active XM subscription, the following features are available: • XM Sports*1 (See page 351.) • XM Stocks*1 (See page 354.) • XM Fuel Prices*2 (See page 357.) • XM NavWeather™*2 (See page 361.) • XM NavTraffic®*2 (See page 365.) 1 * : Available at no extra charge with an ac- tive XM Satellite Radio subscription. *2: Available via separate XM subscrip- tion(s). SUBSCRIPTION(S)  XM NavTraffic®, XM NavWeather™ and XM TravelLink require separate XM subscription(s). XM Sports*, XM Stocks* and XM Fuel Prices are available with an XM TravelLink subscription. After a 90-day trial, you must contact XM and set up the appropriate XM subscription(s) to continue receiving these services. *: XM Sports and XM Stocks are included with an XM Satellite Radio subscription. AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)  The XM NavTraffic® service is available in the contiguous 48 U.S. states and Canada.  The XM NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices services are available in the contiguous 48 U.S. states. ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)  To receive XM NavTraffic®, XM NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices services, the XM service must be activated. To activate the service, call the XM Listener Care Center at 1877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-4389677 (Canada).  Customers should have their radio ID ready. The radio ID can be found by selecting “CH 000” on the radio. For details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID” on page 229. INFORMATION ●For further details about the service, contact your Lexus dealer. ●XM Satellite Radio is responsible for all fees and services, which are subject to change. XM RADIO SERVICES — DESCRIPTIONS ■ RADIO AND ENTERTAINMENT XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is available online at (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.com www.xmradio.ca (Canada). ■ INFOTAINMENT AND DATA SERVICES XM offers a variety of advanced infotainment and data services. 348 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW XM RADIO SERVICES — SUBSCRIPTION INSTRUCTIONS Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada*. *: Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio. Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at; U.S.A. Customers Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987 Canadian Customers Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-438-9677 8 INFORMATION For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio, and some Infotainment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included. Required XM Radio and some Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. ©2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at: U.S.A. Customers Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987 Canadian Customers Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 XM RADIO SERVICES — LEGAL DISCLAIMERS AND WARNINGS 349 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices. 350 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 1. XM Sports XM Sports is a service included with an XM Satellite Radio subscription. This service is also available with an XM TravelLink subscription. With this service, you can receive updates via the navigation system on your personally selected sports teams. 3 Select “XM Sports”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.  The “XM Sports” screen is displayed.  The following operations can be performed: • Sports information can be received. (See page 352.) • XM Sports settings can be set. (See page 352.) 2 Select “Info/Apps”. 8 INFORMATION 351 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION RECEIVE SPORTS INFORMATION XM Sports SETTINGS —ADD OR DELETE TEAMS The desired teams must be added in order to receive information. (See page 352.) To input your personalized XM Sports team. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “XM Sports” on the “Information” screen. 4 Select the desired team to receive infor- 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “XM Sports” on the “Information” screen. 4 Select “Options”. mation. 5 Perform each setting according to the  Teams for which there is no current data available will be dimmed and you will not be able to select them. procedures outlined on the following pages. 5 Select the individual information item to hear it, or select “Read All” to hear all available information for that team.  Personalized XM Sports teams can also be input from the “Setup” screen. (See “XM SETTINGS” on page 368.)  The selected information will be read out in its entirety. 352 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION ADD SPORTS TEAM DELETE SPORTS TEAMS 1 Select “Add Sports Team”. 1 Select “Delete Sports Teams”.  Up to 5 teams can be added and saved in the system for which information will be received. The desired teams can be changed at any time. Teams must be added one at a time. 2 Select the individual sports team to be deleted or select “Select All” to delete all the teams, and select “Delete”. 2 Select the desired sporting league of the team. 3 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel. 3 Select the name of the desired team to be added from the list that appears. 8 INFORMATION 4 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel. 353 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 2. XM Stocks XM Stocks is a service included with an XM Satellite Radio subscription. This service is also available with an XM TravelLink subscription. With this service, you can receive updates via the navigation system on your personally selected stocks. 3 Select “XM Stocks”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Info/Apps”. 354 RX450h/350_Navi_U  The “XM Stocks” screen is displayed.  The following operations can be performed: • Stock data can be received. (See page 355.) • XM Stocks setting can be set. (See page 355.) 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION RECEIVE STOCK DATA You must first add your desired stocks prior to receiving data. (See page 355.) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “XM Stocks” on the “Information” screen. 4 Select an individual stock to hear its re- lated data, or select “Read All” to hear the data for all the stocks saved in the system. XM Stocks SETTINGS —ADD OR DELETE STOCKS To input your personalized XM Stocks settings. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “XM Stocks” on the “Information” screen. 4 Select “Options”. 5 Perform each setting according to the  The selected data will be read out in its entirety.  Stock data may be delayed by approximately 20 minutes. procedures outlined on the following pages. 8 355 RX450h/350_Navi_U INFORMATION  Personalized XM Stocks settings can also be input from the “Setup” screen. (See “XM SETTINGS” on page 368.) 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION ADD STOCK DELETE STOCKS 1 Select “Add Stock”. 1 Select “Delete Stocks”. 2 Input the desired stock symbol. 2 Select the individual stock to be deleted or select “Select All” to delete all the stocks, and select “Delete”. 3 When finished, select “OK”.  Up to 10 individual stock symbols can be added and saved in the system for which information will be received. Stocks must be input one at a time. To enter a stock, the symbol of the desired stock must be known. 356 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel. 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 3. XM Fuel Prices XM Fuel Prices is a service included with an XM TravelLink subscription. It enables the navigation system to display current fuel prices and gas station locations, which can be set as a destination if desired. XM Fuel Prices SCREEN SHOW XM Fuel Prices INFORMATION 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. Gas station name Sort VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE INFORMATION 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu” screen. 2 Select “Info/Apps”. 3 Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Information” screen. 4 Select the desired gas station from the list. 8  The location of the selected gas station will be displayed on the map screen.  The “Fuel Price” screen is displayed. 357 RX450h/350_Navi_U INFORMATION 3 Select “XM Fuel Prices”. 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 5 Select “Info”. XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS The desired fuel type, preferred brand, and show prices reported can be registered. REGISTER FUEL TYPE  When the map scale is at the maximum range of 0.5 miles (800 m), is not shown. When the map scale is at the minimum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is not shown. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Setup”. “Mark”: Select to mark the selected gas station on the map screen. “Go to ”: Select to set the selected gas station as a destination with route directions. “Add to Route”: Select to add the selected gas station as a destination. “Detail”: Select to read the selected gas station’s information.  If is selected, the registered phone number can be called. INFORMATION ●The information displayed is received via satellite radio. Depending on the time the information is received, the displayed information may not be up to date. 358 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3 Select “Other”. 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 4 Select “XM Fuel Prices”. REGISTER PREFERRED BRAND 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Other” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other Settings” screen. 5 Select “Fuel Type”. 4 Select “Preferred Brand”. 6 Select the desired fuel type. 5 Select the preferred brand. 6 Select “Save”.  “Premium”, “Midgrade”, “Regular” or “Diesel” can be selected. 7 Select “Save”. 8 INFORMATION 359 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION REGISTER SHOW PRICES REPORTED 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Other” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other Settings” screen. 4 Select “Show Prices Reported”. 5 Select the desired period.  “Last 24 Hours”, “Last 2 Days” or “Show All” can be selected.  If “Show All” is selected, information about gas stations which fuel prices are not provided is also displayed on the list. 6 Select “Save”. 360 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 4. XM NavWeather™ The subscription-based XM NavWeather™ service allows the navigation system to display weather information on the map screen.  The following operations can be performed: • Show XM NavWeather™ information: Weather forecast information is displayed on the map screen. (See page 361.) • Weather information: Weather information for the selected city is displayed. (See page 363.) • Weather warnings: Weather warnings issued within a radius of approximately 15 miles (25 km) or 7.8 miles (12.5 km) around the vehicle are displayed on the warning screen. (See page 364.) SHOW XM NavWeather™ INFORMATION 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Info/Apps”. 3 Select “XM NavWeather”.  The XM NavWeather screen is displayed. XM NavWeather™ SCREEN Remote Touch. 8 361 RX450h/350_Navi_U INFORMATION “Info.”  When the city icon is selected, “Info.” is displayed on the map screen. Selecting this screen button displays the “Forecast” screen. (See page 363.) 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION City icon  When this screen button is selected, city names and “Info.” are displayed on the upper part of the screen. “Forecast”  When this screen button is selected, the city selection screen is displayed. Icon Weather Tornado Hurricane Storm Flood Winter • Select a city to display weather information. Weather information of the selected city will be displayed. (See page 363.) “Current Location”  When “Current Location” is selected, the current position is displayed. Wind Extremes Zoom in/out screen button  The scale of the map can be changed. Three zoom levels can be selected; 16 miles (26 km), 30 miles (48 km) and 60 miles (97 km). Other Weather icons and grids  Inclement weather information is displayed on the map using weather icons and grids. Selecting an icon shows the related information at the top of the screen. Severe thunderstorm Hail storm Heavy fog Heavy freezing rain/ice Heavy snow Heavy rain 362 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION WEATHER INFORMATION No. Function  When the specified day’s weather screen button is selected, weather information for a specified day is displayed. No. Function Received time Daytime weather City name Nighttime weather Today’s date Maximum temperature Current weather Minimum temperature Current temperature Precipitation probability Today’s weather Tomorrow’s weather Day after tomorrow’s weather Observed time (Time elapsed since last update) 8 Specified day’s weather INFORMATION 363 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION WEATHER WARNINGS Weather warnings issued within a radius of approximately 15 miles (25 km) or 7.8 miles (12.5 km) around the vehicle are displayed on the warning screen. “Weather Map”: When this screen button is selected, the “XM NavWeather” screen is displayed. “OK”: When this screen button is selected, the screen returns to the map of the current position. XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR  When an XM NavWeather™ warning is issued within the vicinity, the XM NavWeather™ indicator will appear on the map screen. 364 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 5. XM NavTraffic® The subscription-based XM NavTraffic® service allows the navigation system to display traffic information on the map screen. SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. The following operations can be performed:  Show XM NavTraffic® Information: Traffic information is displayed on the map screen. (See page 366.)  Auto Avoid Traffic: If any heavy congestion or moderate traffic has been detected on the guidance route, it may be possible for you to select another route offered by the system. (See page 130.)  Traffic Incident Warning: Traffic congestion information is provided using voice guidance. (See page 67.)  Show Free Flowing Traffic: Freely flowing traffic is shown by the arrow on the map. (See page 131.) 2 Select “Info/Apps”. INFORMATION ●When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. (See page 366.) 3 Select “Traffic Incidents”. 8 365 RX450h/350_Navi_U INFORMATION  A list of current traffic incidents is displayed along with information on the incident’s distance and position relative to the vehicle. 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION 4 Select the desired traffic event. SHOW XM NavTraffic® INFORMATION 1 Select “Show on Map”. “On Current Route”: Select to display the traffic congestion information for the selected route, or the road which the current vehicle is on. If a route has not been set, “On Current Road” will be displayed. 2 Select “Traffic Information”. 5 This screen is displayed.  Guidance route traffic information is displayed on the screen. Select “Detail” to display detailed traffic event information.  The “Traffic Information” indicator is highlighted. 3 XM NavTraffic® information is displayed on the map screen. On the map screen On the freeway information screen 366 RX450h/350_Navi_U 3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION XM NavTraffic® icon  When any traffic information is received, the XM NavTraffic® icon will appear on the map screen. Selecting the XM NavTraffic® icon on the screen will start voice guidance for the traffic information. (See page 46.)  When the XM NavTraffic® icon is selected, voice guidance for the traffic information will start even if “Off” for “Traffic Incident Warning” is selected. XM NavTraffic® information arrow ®  When any XM NavTraffic information is received, the XM NavTraffic® information arrow will appear on the map screen. The color of the arrow changes depending on the traffic information received. Color Red Function Heavy congestion Yellow Moderate traffic Green Freely flowing traffic XM NavTraffic® indicator  When any XM NavTraffic® information is received, the XM NavTraffic® indicator will appear on the screen. The color of the indicator changes depending on the traffic information received. Color Function White Traffic information has been received. Yellow Traffic restriction information on the guidance route has been received (screen button*). Red Congestion information on the guidance route has been received (screen button*). *: Selecting the XM NavTraffic® indicator will start voice guidance. 8 INFORMATION 367 RX450h/350_Navi_U 4. SETUP 1. XM SETTINGS Used for changing settings for XM Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices. 4 Select the item to be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.  On this screen, the following functions can be performed: No. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Other”. 368 RX450h/350_Navi_U Function Page Select to set XM Sports. 351 Select to set XM Stocks. 354 Select to set XM Fuel Prices. 357 9 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 1 1 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW 1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 370 2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE............................ 371 BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION .............. 373 PREPARATION BEFORE USING APPS ........................................................ 374 2 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 2 1. APPS ............................................................ 380 ACTIVATING “APPS”......................................... 380 LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION ....................................... 383 INPUTTING KEYWORD OPERATION ....................................................... 385 3 4 2. Destination Assist..................................... 387 MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist ................................................ 387 3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM................... 376 3. eDestination............................................... 389 BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION .............. 377 DOWNLOAD eDestinations ........................... 389 4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM......... 379 RETRIEVE AN eDestination.............................. 390 5 6 SHOW eDestination ICONS.............................. 391 4. Lexus Insider .............................................. 392 7 VIEW AND PLAY RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES.............................. 392 NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.............. 394 Lexus Insider SETTINGS ..................................... 395 8 9 10 369 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW 1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Lexus Enform with Safety Connect is a feature that includes Apps, Destination Assist, eDestination, Lexus Insider, and Safety Connect.  The functions included in Lexus Enform with Safety Connect are classified into the following three types. Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phone Type B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation system Type C: Function achieved by using DCM Function Type Apps Type A Destination Assist Type B eDestination Type B Lexus Insider Type B Safety Connect Type C  Each function is available in the following areas: • Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska. • Destination Assist and eDestination are available in the contiguous United States. • Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous 48 states and Canada. • Safety Connect includes four features. Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location are available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance is available in the United States (except Hawaii) and in Canada. INFORMATION ●The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition. 370 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW 2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, only Apps can be achieved by using a cellular phone. Apps is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular phone to be displayed on and operated from the navigation screen. Before Apps can be used, a few settings need to be performed. (See page 374.) LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 9 371 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW No. Name Function Contents provider Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone. Application server Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellular phone. Cellular phone* Using the Apps application, communication is relayed between the navigation system, the application server and the contents provider. A cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating. Application player Runs applications on the navigation system. The navigation system is equipped with an application player. Applications (“Apps”) Displays and sounds the usable contents from the contents providers via a cellular phone on the application player. Navigation system Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents provider servers are displayed on the navigation screen. *: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink. 372 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION SUBSCRIPTION  Apps will be available on a trial period included upon purchase of a new vehicle. User registration is required to start using the service. (See page 375.)  When a trial period has elapsed after purchasing a new vehicle, a fee will be charged to renew the contract.*  Services requiring a separate contract can also be used.* The personal data used in “Apps” can be reset. (See “DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on page 63.)  The following personal data can be deleted and returned to their default settings: • Downloaded contents • Radio stations that were listened to • Input history INFORMATION ●Once initialized, data will be erased. Pay close attention when initializing the data. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT *: For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/ enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987. INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE  Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska. INFORMATION ●When using Apps, depending on the details of your cellular phone contract, data usage fees may apply. Confirm data usage fees before using this service. ●In this section, the required operations to activate “Apps”, connect a cellular phone to the navigation system and registration steps for Apps are explained. For details regarding Apps operations and each of the “Apps”, refer to http:// www.lexus.com/enform/. 9 373 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW PREPARATION BEFORE USING APPS SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE APPS Perform the settings in the following order. 1 User registration 2 Download the Apps application to your cellular phone. USER REGISTRATION When purchasing the vehicle, an email address is registered at your Lexus dealer. If your email address was not registered at your Lexus dealer, your email address can be registered at the Lexus drivers website. A user registration guidance email containing a web address will be sent. 1 Perform user registration from the designated web address. INFORMATION 3 Register the cellular phone with the navigation system. In order to use Apps, the following settings must first be performed:  User registration with the service contract (See page 374.)  Download the Apps application onto your cellular phone, and login to the application. (See page 375.)  Register the cellular phone that the Apps application was downloaded to with the navigation system. (See page 375.)  Register a Bluetooth® phone with the hands-free system. (For detailed information about registration and settings, see “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 197.) 374 RX450h/350_Navi_U ●If your email address was not registered at your Lexus dealer when the vehicle was purchased, an email address can be registered at http://www.lexus.com/ enform/. 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW REGISTERING THE APPS APPLICATION 1 Download the Apps application to your cellular phone. 2 Run the Apps application on your cellular phone. 3 Enter the information required into the Apps application. Login to the application. INFORMATION LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT ●“Apps” can only be used when the Apps application has been downloaded to your cellular phone and the application is running. ●Apps operational procedures can also be confirmed by visiting http:// www.lexus.com/enform/. ●In order to use applications, it is necessary to run the Apps application on your cellular phone. ●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation may become unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. ●If a Apps application is used while iPod audio is being played back, system operation may become unstable. 9 375 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW 3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Destination Assist, eDestination, and Lexus Insider can be achieved by making DCM cooperate with the navigation system. These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System (GPS) data, embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well as convenience features to subscribers. The services are supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. The services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles. No. Name No. Name Lexus’ designated response center DCM TEL, GPS antenna Navigation system 376 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION SUBSCRIPTION  After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-2553987), or select “Destination Assist” in your vehicle for further subscription details. (See page 387.) AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)  Enrollment in Lexus Enform with Safety Connect (via your dealership) is required to activate all services.  Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101 FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B FCC ID: N7NGTM2 NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT  Destination Assist and eDestination are available in the contiguous United States.  Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous 48 states and Canada. ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S) 9 377 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW INFORMATION ●Exposure to radio frequency signals: The Lexus Enform with Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low power radio transmitter and receiver. The system receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. ●In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. • ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] • NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986] • ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996] ●Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). ●The design of Lexus Enform with Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards. 378 RX450h/350_Navi_U INFORMATION ●Available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact with the Lexus Enform with Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, navigation map data, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected. ●The Lexus Enform with Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. ●Select Lexus Enform with Safety Connect-subscribed vehicles are capable of communicating vehicle information, triggering owner reminder notifications. Owners who do not wish to have their vehicle transmit this information can opt out of the service at the time of enrollment or by calling 1-800-255-3987 and follow the prompt for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect. ●For further details about the service, contact your Lexus dealer. ●Lexus Enform with Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible. 1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW 4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Safety Connect can be achieved by using DCM. For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 9 379 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 1. APPS ACTIVATING “APPS” 3 Select “Apps”. Each time “Apps” is activated, the system checks for updates. When there are no updates available, the main menu screen will be displayed right after a screen indicating that updates are being checked for has been displayed. ACTIVATING “APPS” 4 A screen indicating that updates are being checked for will be displayed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 Select “OK”. 2 Select “Info/Apps”.  To cancel updating, select “Cancel”.  After selecting “Cancel”, the “Information” screen will be displayed.  The “Information” screen will also be displayed if updating fails. 380 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 6 A screen indicating that an update is in 8 When updating is complete, the main  To stop updating, select “Cancel”.  After selecting “Cancel”, the “Information” screen will be displayed.  The “Information” screen will also be displayed if updating fails.  The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different.  For details about the function and service of each application displayed in the main menu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/ enform/. progress will be displayed. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 7 Select “OK”. menu screen will be displayed. 9 381 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action. Message Display conditions Corrective action “This feature is unavailable during an emergency call.” Safety Connect is being implemented. After Safety Connect is finished, perform the operation again. “This feature is unavailable while transferring contacts.” Contacts are being transferred manually from the phonebook. When the transfer of contacts is complete, perform the operation. “Your smartphone is not currently connected. For assistance, visit lexus.com/ mobilelink, contact your local Lexus dealer, or call 1-800255-3987.” The cellular phone cannot be connected. Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ mobilelink/ to confirm if the phone is compatible or not. “This feature is unavailable during a handsfree call.” A hands-free call is in progress. After the hands-free call is finished, perform the operation. “To use Enform App Suite, the Enform application needs to be logged-in and running on your phone. For assistance, visit lexus.com/enform or call 1-800-255-3987.” The Apps application cannot be connected to Bluetooth* SPP. Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ enform/ to confirm if the phone is Bluetooth* SPP compatible or not, and then activate the Apps application. “Communication error. Please try again.” Communication was disconnected. After a few moments, retry the operation. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 382 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION 4 A screen indicating that updates are being checked for will be displayed. The navigation system’s setting a destination and making a hands-free call can be performed via “Apps”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 When updating is complete, the main menu screen will be displayed.  The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different.  For details about the function and service of each application displayed in the main menu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/ enform/. INFORMATION 3 Select “Apps”. ●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 2 Select “Info/Apps”. 9 383 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION SETTING A DESTINATION USING “APPS” MAKING A PHONE CALL USING “APPS” Locations that were searched using “Apps” can be set as a destination. Phone calls can be made to locations which were searched using “Apps”. 1 Select “Map”. 1 Select “Call”. 2 Select “Go to ”. 2 Select “Yes”. 3 To start guidance, select “OK”.  To cancel making a phone call, select “Cancel”. 3 A screen indicating that a call is in progress will be displayed.  For the operation of the route guidance screen and the function of each screen button, see “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 89. 384 RX450h/350_Navi_U  For phone operation and the function of each screen button, see “TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE” on page 169. 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION INPUTTING KEYWORD OPERATION 3 Input characters will be reflected on the character input space. A keyword can be input to “Apps” by the software keyboard or voice recognition function.  The keyboard layout can be changed. (See page 58.) INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD 1 Select the character input space.  For details on operating the keyboard, see “INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION” on page 36. Voice recognition is a function that uses the center’s database to enable the use of the voice recognition function. 2 Select the screen buttons to input the de- 1 Select the microphone screen button. sired characters, and then select “OK”. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION FUNCTION 9 385 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 2 When this screen is displayed, say the desired keyword.  Completion of saying the keyword will be detected automatically. 3 Search results will be displayed on the screen.  The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different. 386 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 2. Destination Assist Destination Assist provides you with live assistance for finding destinations via the Lexus Enform with Safety Connect response center. You can request either a specific business, address, or ask for help locating your desired destination by category, such as restaurants, gas stations, shopping centers or other Points of Interest (POI). After you tell the agent your choice of destination, its coordinates are sent wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation system. MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 2 Select “Destination”. 3 Select “Destination Assist”. 9  The “Destination Assist” screen is displayed. 387 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 4 When an agent comes on the line, tell the agent the address, business name, or the type of POI or service you would like to locate.  To adjust the call volume, select “–” or “+” on the “Destination Assist” screen, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel during the call.  To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect” on the “Destination Assist” screen or press the switch on the steering wheel. 5 After the agent helps you determine your location of choice, this screen is displayed. Select the button of the screen for the appropriate action. “Mark”: Select to mark the POI on the navigation map. “Map”: Select to display the POI on the navigation map. “Go”: Select to set the POI as a destination with route directions. “Detail”: Select to read the POI notes you entered online, if any.  If is selected, the registered phone number can be called. 388 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 3. eDestination With the eDestination feature, you can go online, via the Lexus.com owner’s Web site, to select and organize destinations of your choice and then wirelessly send them to your vehicle’s navigation system. Up to 200 locations can be stored online and accessed or updated at any time. DOWNLOAD eDestinations After updating eDestination folders online, the information to update the data in the vehicle will be needed to download. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.  Locations can be organized into up to 20 personalized folders. INFORMATION LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT ●You must first go online at www.lexus.com/drivers/ to view the Owners site where you will need to register and log in. After this, personalized folders that contains the locations to be sent to your vehicle can be created. (See Lexus Enform with Safety Connect Guide for more information.) 2 Select “Destination”. 3 Select “Point of Interest”. 9 389 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 4 Select “eDestination”. RETRIEVE AN eDestination 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” on page 10.) 2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen.  The “eDestination” screen is displayed. 5 Select “Download”. 3 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen. 4 Select “eDestination” on the “Point of Interest” screen. 5 Select the desired eDestination folder. 6 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel download.  When “Yes” is selected, your most recent online eDestination data will be loaded to the navigation system. 390 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 6 Select the desired location. SHOW eDestination ICONS 1 Select “Show on Map”. 7 Select the button of the screen for the appropriate action. 2 Select “eDestination Icons”.  The “eDestination Icons” indicator is highlighted.  If is selected, the registered phone number can be called. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT “Mark”: Select to mark the POI on the navigation map. “Map”: Select to display the POI on the navigation map. “Go”: Select to set the POI as a destination with route directions. “Detail”: Select to read the POI notes you entered online, if any. 9 391 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION 4. Lexus Insider Lexus Insider is an optional service that can send audio messages, or articles, to participating owners’ vehicles via the navigation system. Potential Lexus Insider subjects might include, for example, Lexus vehicle technology tips, updates on regional Lexus events, or audio excerpts from Lexus Magazine articles. Up to 20 articles can be stored at a time. You may opt out of receiving Lexus Insider messages at any time. (See page 394.) VIEW AND PLAY RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES 3 Select “LEXUS Insider”.  The “LEXUS Insider” screen is displayed. 4 Select the desired article title from the Lexus Insider menu to play that broadcast or select “Read All” to listen to all stored Lexus Insider broadcasts. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Info/Apps”. 392 RX450h/350_Navi_U  When “Read All” is selected, “Stop” is displayed. To stop listening to the broadcast, select “Stop”.  To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider, press the “MODE” switch on the steering wheel, or press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button on the audio system. 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION ABOUT ICONS DOWNLOAD A POI  Icons appear at the left of the Lexus Insider story titles and indicate the following: Icon Article Unread article Previously read article Some Lexus Insider stories will contain a downloadable POI relevant to the content. 1 If it contains a POI, “Enter ” can be se- lected to download it to the navigation system. 2 Select “Go to ” to set the POI as a destination with route directions. Unread article with downloadable Point of Interest (POI) LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT Previously read article with downloadable Point of Interest (POI) LISTEN TO ANOTHER ARTICLE 1 After selecting an individual article, se- lect “Next” or “Previous” to listen to another article. 9  The “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheel can be used to move to the previous or next article.  To stop listening to the broadcast, select “Stop” or press the “PWR·VOL” knob on the audio system. 393 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION DELETE Lexus Insider ARTICLE 1 Select “Delete”. NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION When the vehicle is first powered on and a new Lexus Insider article is available, a notification will appear on the navigation screen. The notice will appear for only approximately 6 seconds unless one of the options listed is selected. 2 Select the individual article title to be deleted or “Select All” to delete all the article titles, and select “Delete”. 3 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel. 394 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1 When the new message notification ap- pears, any of the following options can be selected. “Listen Now”: Select to play newly received Lexus Insider article(s). “Listen Later”: Select to remove notification screen without playing articles. Notification will be displayed again when the vehicle is next powered on. 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION Lexus Insider SETTINGS 4 Select “LEXUS Insider”. To change Lexus Insider settings, notification, and opt in or out of article receipt. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 This screen is displayed.  Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages. 3 Select “Other”. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 2 Select “Setup”. 9 395 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION RECEIVE/OPT OUT OF Lexus Insider 1 Select “Receive LEXUS Insider”. 2 Select “Yes” to receive Lexus Insider ar- RESTORE THE DEFAULT Lexus Insider SETTINGS 1 Select “Default”. ticles or “No” to opt out of receiving articles. 2 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel. 3 Select “Save”. NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION Automatic notification of new Lexus Insider articles is available and is the default setting. 1 Select “New Message Notification”. 2 Select “On” or “Off”. 3 Select “Save”. 396 RX450h/350_Navi_U 10 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 1 1 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM 2 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM................................................... 398 1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ........... 404 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ............... 398 DRIVING PRECAUTIONS .............................. 398 SETTING THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST MODE .................................................... 404 SCREEN DISPLAY ............................................... 399 DISPLAY .................................................................... 405 2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS................................... 400 AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN................ 400 THE CAMERA .......................................................... 401 3. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW..................................................... 402 IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS ......... 402 2 TYPES OF SENSORS.......................................... 404 THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER ................................................................. 406 3 4 DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS .............................................................. 407 SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION................................................. 407 5 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING ...................................... 409 CERTIFICATION................................................... 409 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING................................... 410 SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME...................... 410 6 7 SETTING A PARKING SONAR DISPLAY.................................................................... 411 SETTING A DISPLAY AND TONE INDICATION.......................................................... 411 8 9 10 397 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking. INFORMATION ●The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen. DRIVING PRECAUTIONS The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit another vehicle, and could possibly cause an accident. Pay attention to the following precautions when using the rear view monitor system. 398 RX450h/350_Navi_U CAUTION ●Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle. ●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. ●When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it. ●In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. ●The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (See page 401.) 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM SCREEN DISPLAY The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the “R” position while the “POWER” <“ENGINE START STOP”> switch is in ON mode.  Intuitive parking assist If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the screen. CANCELING REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM  When the shift lever is shifted to the “R” position and any mode button (such as the “MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote Touch) is pressed  The rear view monitor system is canceled, and the screen is switched to the mode of the button that was pressed. PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM The rear view monitor system is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the “R” position. 10 399 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM 2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle. Displayed area Screen Corners of bumper  The image adjustment procedure for the rear view monitor system screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the navigation screen. (See page 39.) 400 RX450h/350_Navi_U INFORMATION ●The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions. ●Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed. ●The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. ●Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor. 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM THE CAMERA The camera for the rear view monitor system is located as shown in the illustration. USING THE CAMERA ●The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases. • If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change. • As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation. • Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot transmit a clear image. • Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible. • If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally. • When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. ●Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse. NOTICE 10 401 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM 3. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check. If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Symptom Likely cause Solution The image is difficult to see  The vehicle is in a dark area  The temperature around the lens is either high or low  The outside temperature is low  There are water droplets on the camera  It is raining or humid  Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the camera  Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera  The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc. Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor system is the same as the procedure for adjusting the navigation screen. (See page 39.) The image is blurry Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera. Rinse the camera lens with water and wipe it clean with a soft cloth. Wash with a mild soap if the dirt is stubborn. 402 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM Symptom Likely cause Solution A vertical white streak is on the screen When a bright spot (such as sunlight reflecting off the body of another vehicle) is received by the camera, a vertical streak may be left above and below the bright spot (smear effect). Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) Bright spot The image is out of alignment The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 10 403 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when using this system. TYPES OF SENSORS SETTING THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST MODE 1 Press the menu switch.  The multi-information display will change modes to electronic features control mode. 2 Press the “ ” or “ ” switch above and below the “ENTER” switch until the intuitive parking assist-sensor mark appears in the multi-information display. Front corner sensors Front center sensors Rear corner sensors 3 Press the “ENTER” switch to select “ON”. Rear center sensors  The intuitive parking assist-sensor indicator will be displayed.  Pressing the switch turns the intuitive parking assist-sensor on or off. To turn on: Press the switch. The buzzer sounds to inform the driver that the system is operational. To turn off: Press the switch again.  Press the menu switch to change to the normal display. 404 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DISPLAY When the sensors detect an obstacle, the graphic is shown on the multi-information display and navigation display according to position and distance to the obstacle. ■ MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY ■ NAVIGATION DISPLAY When the vehicle is moving forward  The graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is detected. The screen can be set so that the graphic is not displayed. (See page 410.) When the vehicle is moving backward  A simplified image is displayed on the right upper corner of the screen when an obstacle is detected. Front corner sensors operation PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM Front center sensors operation Rear corner sensors operation Rear center sensors operation 10 405 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. ■ CORNER SENSORS Level 1 2 3 4 Display example  Buzzer  Medium Fast Continuous 1 2 3 4 Slow Medium Fast Continuous ■ CENTER SENSORS Level Display example Buzzer ■ DETECTION LEVEL AND APPROXIMATE DISTANCE TO AN OBSTACLE Level 1 2 3 4 Front corner sensors  1.6 to 1.2 ft. (50 to 37.5 cm) 1.2 to 0.8 ft. (37.5 to 25 cm) 0.8 ft. (25 cm) or less Front center sensors 3.3 to 1.6 ft. (100 to 50 cm) 1.6 to 1.3 ft. (50 to 40 cm) 1.3 to 1.0 ft. (40 to 30 cm) 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less Rear corner sensors  1.6 to 1.2 ft. (50 to 37.5 cm) 1.2 to 0.8 ft. (37.5 to 25 cm) 0.8 ft. (25 cm) or less Rear center sensors 4.9 to 2.0 ft. (150 to 60 cm) 2.0 to 1.5 ft. (60 to 45 cm) 1.5 to 1.2 ft. (45 to 35 cm) 1.2 ft. (35 cm) or less INFORMATION ●Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (See page 410.) 406 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)  The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.  The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.  In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are. 407 RX450h/350_Navi_U PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)  There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.  A sensor is frozen.  A sensor is covered in any way.  The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.  On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass  The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.  There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist-sensors in the vicinity.  A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.  The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.  Towing eyelets are installed.  A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.  The vehicle is approaching a tall or rightangled curb.  In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.  A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed. 10 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST  The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles: • Wires, fences, ropes, etc. • Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves • Sharply-angled objects • Low obstacles • Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle CAUTION ●Caution when using the intuitive parking assist-sensor Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. • Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). • Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range. ●Even though sensors which are functioning properly continue to detect obstacles, never use the intuitive parking assist if one more sensor(s) may be malfunctioning. 408 RX450h/350_Navi_U NOTICE ●Notes when washing the vehicle ●Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. ●Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. ●As the intuitive parking assist-sensor might be malfunctioning in the following cases, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. • The graphic which indicates that an obstacle has been detected does not come on and a beep does not sound even when the intuitive parking assist mode is turned on. • The graphic which indicates that an obstacle has been detected comes on despite no obstacle around the vehicle. • If your vehicle has been involved in an accident. • If the graphic which indicates that an obstacles has been detected remains on without a beeping sound. 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST INTUITIVE PARKING ASSISTSENSOR FAILURE WARNING If an error is detected when the intuitive parking assist-sensor is turned on, the vehicle symbol comes on or flashes with beeping sounds. WHEN THE SENSOR IS MALFUNCTIONING Multi-information display INFORMATION ●The intuitive parking assist-sensor failure warning display is not given in either of the following operations: • Changing to another screen • Turning off the main switch for the intuitive parking assist-sensor WHEN SNOWFLAKES OR MUD GETS ON THE SENSORS Multi-information display  If this message appears, have the intuitive parking assist-sensor checked by your Lexus dealer. CERTIFICATION For vehicles sold in Canada. INFORMATION ●If this message appears, remove the foreign matter from the sensor. ●If the failure warning does not go off even after the foreign matter is removed, the intuitive parking assist-sensor may be malfunctioning. Have it checked by your Lexus dealer. 10 409 RX450h/350_Navi_U PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM  This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.  Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada. 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING The volume of the beeps, turning on or off of the display, etc. can be set. 5 Select the desired button. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 6 Select “Save”. SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME The alert volume can be adjusted. 2 Select “Setup”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen. 4 Select the desired screen button. 3 Select “Vehicle”.  The volume has 5 levels, increasing with higher value. 4 Select “LEXUS Park Assist”. 410 RX450h/350_Navi_U 5 Select “Save”. 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING A PARKING SONAR DISPLAY SETTING A DISPLAY AND TONE INDICATION Parking sonar display can be set to on or off. Front and back sensors display and tone indication can be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the 2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the 4 Select “Display Off” to turn off the 4 Select “Front” or “Rear”. Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. “Vehicle Settings” screen. parking sonar display. INFORMATION ●Although “Display Off” is selected, if the obstacle is detected during the intuitive parking assist monitoring, the warning appears on the right top of the screen. “Vehicle Settings” screen.  Selecting “Front” or “Rear” to switch the distance for the front or back sensors display and tone indication, from long distance to short distance, or from short distance to long distance. 5 Select “Save”. PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 5 Select “Save”. Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 10 411 RX450h/350_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 412 RX450h/350_Navi_U INDEX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 413 RX450h/350_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX A B A/C .................................................................... 316, 327 Adding destinations............................................... 100 Air conditioning system ........................................ 319 Air flow control buttons .............................. 316, 321 Air intake control button ........................... 316, 322 AM................................................................................. 221 Apps............................................................................ 380 Activating “Apps”............................................. 380 Inputting keyword operation....................... 385 Linking “Apps” and navigation local function ................................................. 383 Audio ............................................................................ 212 Audio language code ........................................... 249 Audio settings ........................................................... 312 HD Radio™ system settings .......................... 312 iPod settings ......................................................... 313 Audio split screen display .................................... 215 Audio/video remote controls (steering switches) ........................................... 300 Audio/video system ............................................... 212 AUTO button.................................................. 316, 319 Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)................... 217 AUX port.................................................................... 219 Basic function.............................................................. 32 Bluetooth® ................................................................ 148 Bluetooth® audio................................................... 269 Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player.................................................... 273 Playing Bluetooth® audio ............................. 274 Bluetooth® phone .................................................. 148 Bluetooth® phone message function.............. 172 Checking messages........................................... 172 New message notification............................... 174 Replying (quick reply) ....................................... 173 Bluetooth® settings ................................................ 197 Detailed Bluetooth® settings....................... 205 Registered devices............................................. 197 Selecting a Bluetooth® phone .................... 202 Selecting portable player .............................. 203 Brightness......................................................... 40, 246 414 RX450h/350_Navi_U C Call on the Bluetooth® phone ............................ 161 By call history........................................................ 163 By dial ....................................................................... 161 By phonebook....................................................... 161 By POI call............................................................. 167 By speed dial......................................................... 163 By voice recognition.......................................... 165 Calling using an SMS/MMS message ...... 167 CD................................................................................ 235 Changing the screen off image ............................ 61 Changing the startup image ................................ 59 Climate control........................................................ 318 Clock.............................................................................. 54 Color................................................................... 57, 246 Command list .......................................................... 337 Contrast............................................................. 40, 246 Covered area .......................................................... 346 Current position calibration................................ 134 Current position display........................................... 41 D Deleting destinations .............................................. 101 Deleting personal data............................................ 63 Deleting previous destinations .......................... 125 Deleting set destinations ....................................... 88 Destination Assist.................................................. 387 Make a call with Destination Assist .......... 387 “Destination” screen................................................. 24 Destination search .................................................... 70 By “Address” .......................................................... 72 By “Address Book”............................................. 83 By “Coordinates”.................................................. 87 By “Destination Assist”...................................... 82 By “Emergency”................................................... 83 By home..................................................................... 71 By “Intersection & Freeway”........................... 84 By “Map” .................................................................. 87 By “Point of Interest” ........................................... 75 By preset destinations ......................................... 71 By “Previous Destinations”.............................. 82 Selecting the search area ................................. 70 415 RX450h/350_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX Detailed navigation settings................................ 127 Detour setting ........................................................... 102 Dial................................................................................. 165 Disc slot ....................................................................... 212 Distance and time to destination......................... 99 Driver’s side temperature control buttons .......................................... 316, 319 DSP control................................................................ 217 Dual ................................................................... 316, 320 DVD.............................................................................. 219 DVD player.............................................................. 235 DVD options ....................................................... 244 DVD player and DVD video disc information ..................................................... 254 Ejecting a disc .................................................... 235 If the player malfunctions .............................. 253 Inserting a disc ................................................... 235 Operating a DVD disc..................................... 241 Playing a disc...................................................... 236 Playing a DVD disc........................................... 242 Playing an MP3/WMA disc........................ 238 416 RX450h/350_Navi_U E eDestination ............................................................ 389 Download eDestinations .............................. 389 Retrieve an eDestination .............................. 390 Show eDestination icons................................. 391 Eject button................................................................ 212 Expanded voice commands.............................. 336 F Fan off button.......................................316, 319, 320 Fan speed control buttons........................ 316, 320 FM ................................................................................. 221 Foot print map ............................................................ 50 Fuel consumption................................................... 344 Function index ............................................................ 20 G K General settings........................................................ 52 GPS (Global Positioning System)............. 12, 144 Keyboard layout........................................................ 58 H Language...................................................................... 56 Lexus Enform with Safety Connect ............... 370 Preparation before using Apps................... 374 Lexus Insider............................................................. 392 Lexus Insider settings...................................... 395 New message notification ............................ 394 View and play received Lexus Insider messages............................. 392 Limitations of the navigation system................ 144 List screen operation ............................................... 36 HD Radio™.............................................................. 224 Heading-up screen.................................................... 51 Home ................................................................ 14, 19, 112 I Information ............................................................... 344 “Information” screen................................................ 28 Initial screen ................................................................ 32 Inputting letters and numbers.............................. 36 Internet radio broadcast ..................................... 234 Intuitive parking assist.......................................... 404 iPod.............................................................................. 262 Connecting iPod............................................... 262 Playing iPod music ........................................... 263 Playing iPod video............................................ 266 L 417 RX450h/350_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX M N Map .................................................................................. 41 Map database information and updates....... 424 Map database version and coverage area.................................................... 346 Map icons ...................................................................... 51 Map scale...................................................................... 49 Map screen ................................................................... 12 Map scroll button ....................................................... 10 MAP/VOICE button ............................................... 10 MEDIA button .......................................................... 212 MENU button.............................................................. 10 “Menu” screen ............................................................ 22 Mobile Assistant ...................................................... 341 MP3 ......................................... 238, 290, 306, 309 Natural speech information............................... 335 Navigation settings.................................................... 111 Navigation system .................................................... 70 North-up screen......................................................... 51 418 RX450h/350_Navi_U O Operation flow: guiding the route ...................... 18 Orientation of the map ............................................ 51 P Q Passenger’s side temperature control buttons........................................... 316, 319 Pausing guidance ................................................... 106 Phone (hands-free system for cellular phone) .................................................... 150 Using the phone switch..................................... 151 Using the steering switches............................ 152 When selling or disposing of the vehicle................................................... 153 Phone settings........................................................... 175 Message settings ............................................... 190 Phone display settings ...................................... 194 Phone sound settings ........................................ 175 Phonebook............................................................ 177 Phonebook......................................................... 161, 177 POI call ........................................................................ 167 POI icons..................................................................... 107 Point of Interest.......................................................... 75 Preset destinations.............................................. 16, 71 PRST·TRACK button............................................. 212 PWR·VOL knob ...................................................... 212 Quick guide.................................................................. 10 R Radio............................................................................. 221 Listening to the radio ........................................ 221 Presetting a station ............................................ 221 Radio broadcast data system ....................... 222 Selecting a station ............................................. 222 Traffic announcement ..................................... 223 RADIO button.......................................................... 212 Rear seat entertainment system....................... 279 Changing the source ...................................... 282 Headphone jacks ............................................... 281 Headphones......................................................... 281 Playing a USB memory................................... 287 Playing an audio CD/CD text .................... 289 Playing Bluetooth® audio............................. 288 Playing DVD video.......................................... 290 Playing iPod........................................................ 286 Playing MP3/WMA discs............................ 290 Rear seat entertainment system controller ......................................... 280 Volume ................................................................... 281 419 RX450h/350_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX Rear view monitor system.................................. 398 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger button........................ 316, 325 Receive on the Bluetooth® phone................... 168 Register a Bluetooth® phone ............................ 156 Connecting a Bluetooth® phone................ 158 Reconnecting the Bluetooth® phone........ 160 Registering home ....................................................... 14 Registering preset destinations............................ 16 Remote Touch ............................................................. 10 Reordering destinations ...................................... 100 Resuming guidance................................................ 106 Route guidance ......................................................... 89 Route guidance screen........................................... 93 Route overview ........................................................ 103 Route preference .................................................... 104 Route trace.................................................................. 110 420 RX450h/350_Navi_U S Satellite radio (SAT).................................... 216, 229 Screen adjustment.................................................... 39 Screen Off............................................. 40, 246, 298 Screen scroll operation .......................................... 42 Screen settings adjustment................................... 39 Selecting POI icons to be displayed............... 107 Selecting screen size............................................. 218 Setting and deleting destinations ..................... 100 Setting home as the destination........................... 19 Setting route.............................................................. 102 Setting up the “Address Book”............................ 116 Setting up the “Areas to Avoid”.......................... 121 Setting up the “Home” ............................................ 112 Setting up the “Preset Destinations” ................. 114 “Setup” screen............................................................ 26 Show on map ............................................................ 107 SMS/MMS message.................................... 167, 172 Speed dial................................................................... 163 Standard map icons .................................................. 51 Starting route guidance.......................................... 89 Steering switches ............................ 152, 300, 330 Surround...................................................................... 217 T U Talk on the Bluetooth® phone ........................... 169 USB memory............................................................ 256 Connecting a USB memory ......................... 256 Playing a USB memory................................... 257 USB port ................................................................... 220 Incoming call waiting.......................................... 171 Tire change calibration.......................................... 134 Tone............................................................................. 246 Tone and balance .................................................... 217 Traffic incidents....................................................... 365 TUNE·SCROLL knob ........................................... 212 Typical voice guidance prompts ........................ 96 V Vehicle settings........................................................ 137 Maintenance ........................................................ 137 Vehicle customization...................................... 142 Voice command system................. 215, 318, 330 Voice recognition ................................................... 165 Voice settings.............................................................. 65 Voice volume .............................................................. 65 421 RX450h/350_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX W Windshield air flow button....................... 316, 323 WMA....................................... 238, 290, 306, 309 X XM Fuel Prices........................................................ 357 Show XM Fuel Prices information............. 357 View detailed fuel price information ......... 357 XM Fuel Prices settings................................. 358 XM NavTraffic® .................................................... 365 Show traffic event............................................. 365 Show XM NavTraffic® information ......... 366 XM NavWeather™................................................ 361 Show XM NavWeather™ information..... 361 Weather information ...................................... 363 Weather warnings ........................................... 364 XM NavWeather™ indicator..................... 364 422 RX450h/350_Navi_U XM Satellite Radio broadcast .......................... 229 Channel category............................................. 230 Displaying the radio ID ................................... 229 Displaying the title and name........................ 231 How to subscribe to an XM Satellite Radio ...................................... 229 If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions ................................................... 232 Listening to satellite radio.............................. 230 Presetting a channel ........................................ 230 Selecting a channel ........................................... 231 XM services ............................................................. 348 XM settings .............................................................. 368 XM Sports.................................................................. 351 Receive sports information........................... 352 XM Sports settings — add or delete teams................................................... 352 XM Stocks ................................................................ 354 Receive stock data ........................................... 355 XM Stocks settings — add or delete stocks .................................................. 355 Z Zoom in button ............................................................ 12 Zoom out button......................................................... 12 423 RX450h/350_Navi_U Map database information and updates This system uses the maps of DENSO. 424 RX450h/350_Navi_U 425 RX450h/350_Navi_U 426 RX450h/350_Navi_U 427 RX450h/350_Navi_U 428 RX450h/350_Navi_U 429 RX450h/350_Navi_U 430 RX450h/350_Navi_U 431 RX450h/350_Navi_U Open source license This product uses the following open source software. · T-Kernel This Product uses the Source Code of T-Kernel under T-License granted by the T-Engine Forum (www.t-engine.org). · C Library This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory. Copyright © 1982, 1985, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. © UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. 432 RX450h/350_Navi_U © UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. © UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1987, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1988 University of Utah. Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by the Systems Programming Group of the University of Utah Computer Science Department and Ralph Campbell. Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Arthur David Olson of the National Cancer Institute. Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. © UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. © UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek. Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Berkeley Software Design, Inc. Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell. Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. © UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. 433 RX450h/350_Navi_U This software was developed by the Computer Systems Engineering group at Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory under DARPA contract BG 91-66 and contributed to Berkeley. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory. Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell. This file is derived from the MIPS RISC Architecture book by Gerry Kane. Copyright © 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. 434 RX450h/350_Navi_U This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Andrew Hume of AT&T Bell Laboratories. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 435 RX450h/350_Navi_U THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 436 RX450h/350_Navi_U Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 437 RX450h/350_Navi_U This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors. Copyright © 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T. Conklin. Copyright © 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein. Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1997,98 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T. Conklin. Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code was contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein. Copyright © 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein. Copyright © 1998, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus J. Klein. 438 RX450h/350_Navi_U Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Julian Coleman. Copyright © 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Dieter Baron and Thomas Klausner. Copyright © 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Jun-ichiro itojun Hagino and by Klaus Klein. Copyright © 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas. Copyright © 1997 Christos Zoulas. All rights reserved. 439 RX450h/350_Navi_U Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas. 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 440 RX450h/350_Navi_U THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc. Copyright © 1994 Winning Strategies, Inc. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc. 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 441 RX450h/350_Navi_U Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 442 RX450h/350_Navi_U THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright ©1999 Citrus Project, All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright © 1995 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author: Chris G. Demetriou Copyright © 1995, 1996 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author: Chris G. Demetriou 443 RX450h/350_Navi_U Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation. CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS ““AS IS”” CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to Software Distribution Coordinator or [email protected] School of Computer Science Carnegie Mellon University Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890 any improvements or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie the rights to redistribute these changes. · TCP/IP, Socket Library This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 444 RX450h/350_Navi_U Copyright © 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1983, 1987, 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1983, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1985, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1985, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1989, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright © 2004 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. (““ISC””) Portions Copyright © 1996-1999 by Internet Software Consortium. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. 445 RX450h/350_Navi_U THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission. 446 RX450h/350_Navi_U THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. This product includes software developed by WIDE Project and its contributors. Portions Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by WIDE Project and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright © 1988 Stephen Deering. Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. 447 RX450h/350_Navi_U Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. [rescinded 22 July 1999] 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 448 RX450h/350_Navi_U THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Rights, responsibilities and use of this software are controlled by the agreement found in the ““LICENSE.H”” file distributed with this source code. ““LICENSE.H”” may not be removed from this distribution, modified, enhanced nor references to it omitted. Copyright 1983 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Copyright 1984 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Copyright 1984, 1985 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Copyright 1990 by NetPort Software Copyright 1990-1993 by NetPort Software. Copyright 1990-1994 by NetPort Software. Copyright 1990-1996 by NetPort Software. Copyright 1990-1997 by NetPort Software. Copyright 1993 by NetPort Software Copyright 1986 by Carnegie Mellon All Rights Reserved 449 RX450h/350_Navi_U Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. · OpenSSL This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]). OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. 450 RX450h/350_Navi_U Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)” 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young The ([email protected]). implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and noncommercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 451 RX450h/350_Navi_U 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])” 452 RX450h/350_Navi_U THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.

Lexus - RX 350 - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012 (2)

Get your hands on the complete Lexus factory workshop software

Get notified when we add a new LexusOther Model Manual

We cover 38 Lexus vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

Lexus - LS 460 - Workshop Manual - (2007)

Lexus - GS 300 - Workshop Manual - (1993)

Lexus - GS 350 - Workshop Manual - (2007)

Lexus - LS 400 - Workshop Manual - (1990)

Lexus - LS 460 - Workshop Manual - (2009)

Lexus - SC 430 - Workshop Manual - (2003)

Lexus - GS 300 - Workshop Manual - (2004)

Lexus - GS 450 - Workshop Manual - (2007)

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_350_250-mk-OM53650U

Lexus - GS 350 - Wiring Diagram - (2009)

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_350_250-mk-OM53650U_5d8a7fb2205698a85417799

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53714U

Lexus - SC 400 - Workshop Manual - (1997)

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53893U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53700U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2012_IS_F-mk-OM53A41U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53613U_5d8a7fb2c2cfd1a40044054

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53A25U_5d8a7f7210dd69a35589660

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C33U_5d8a7f721ad2a8a05142317

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53A25U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B49U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53700U_5d8a7f869d7b95a96244745

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53706U_5d8a7f8892bd82a93490888

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C15U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2012_IS_F-mk-OM53A41U_5d8a7fb2bf9a84a89164869

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C15U_5d8a7f840dfc50a73415738

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C33U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53714U_5d8a7fb221eaf2a24629815

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53A11U_5d8a7f733c8fe6a02660009

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53791U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53791U_5d8a7f6645bde2a08742526

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53613U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53A11U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53706U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B59U

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B49U_5d8a7f77b34583a28557958

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53893U_5d8a7f625f6623a15657710

Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B59U_5d8a7f87562bc8a15409052